Home

PC-InfoNode User`s Guide

1. A B c N Total LH Average Rms Voltage 117 7 V 117 8 v 177v o1 v Rms Current 1 394 1 38 4 1 394 0 00 4 Active Power 153 4 WW 163 6 WW 153 4 WW 490 5 Ww Total Fund Freq Q 0 84 var 1 18 var 1 22 var 3 24 var Apparent Power 153 4 YA 153 7 VA 153 5 V 490 5 YA True Power Factor 1 00 1 00 1 00 Displacement Power Factor 1 00 VA Angle 179 7 Degrees 179 6 Degrees 179 5 Degrees Frequency 59 99 Hz Meter panel screen display KJ Scope Mode The Scope display shows real time waveform data for up to 8 channels Scope mode is only available in certain DataNode types such as in EPQ DataNodes E Real time Scope View Microsoft Internet Explorer Service Entrance oes Horiz 4 16 ms div Freg 60 01 Hz VOLTAGE CURRENT controls to set ZOOM ASB G8 D Z00M A B E BD waveform properties Set Hold On Auto Set Set Hold On mE iu rf Voltage 40 volts div Current 1 amps Jdiv 5 4 6 3 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 6 4 Real time Page L Help Much of what is written in this manual can be found in the Help option onscreen Expanding the Help tree will provide Real time Topics and Index links a Real time Topics The Real time Topics page simply says that the user is currently in the Real time page Four active buttons are found in this page Contents Index lt lt and gt gt These buttons present different ways
2. ESE 3 3 Introductiols onerare eraser erence OI A 3 3 Index osea etant tei e Ee Eu ert Dg d 3 3 4 Views Page General Procedures in Making Queries 4 1 Views P ge iioincsrieintinetediadeiieio ie ERE claude 4 2 Turne ifi eoi peste utirt net etie mare ee tee et Pe Tee RU CHEERS RE EET Tete Pon eed 4 3 Timelime Graph iiit c et E ES E ESPERE UR CEREREM E Ue e edd 4 3 Event Last D taill cages ira eere eri eit rni tte a Ee 4 5 Smart VIEWS pipoineen ea a sates Gi hai Eos E EE Ee aa a ES TSR 4 6 3D RMS Mag Dur View essessseseseeeeeeneenen ener R 4 6 RMS Mag Dur VIeW iiie eet GR HUE HERE EHE TR ED 4 7 Smart Trend ceo od ote t ED GLA m ER EH ER 4 8 Event SUMMAY enne n e Seat aR ERE ORE RE LEa e hides 4 9 RMS V rlatiQDis eicit recette coit eter TE pere aeaeaei 4 9 Snapshots d REOR UFU ORE ERE EH ERR EEGE EUER EERREREAA 4 10 Transtents eed tan cout nete mr er a eo eta dedi iu a opp ed 4 10 xii Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Contents lle nen 4 10 VIEWS TODICS Lister EER E E EE D ELA EEE Ede 4 10 Jn E E A E 4 10 5 Reports Page Reports RAGS oreet p aet rsen EM ree Ee REV ES ERREUR PESE NUES 5 1 Smart Repotis obese irri ete Prep eU EH EOD be 5 2 DataNode Sur niaty inier adest Pete EEEE e FEY t Ave orb epe erp 5 2 OOS Compliant orti prot E E E e prr ie Hep Re pee ES 5 2 Voltage Quality 5 2 ice sm cis Eee
3. Total Fund Freq Q Apparent Power True Power Factor 71 7147 71711711719 oojaa i F1 Oy Oy Oy Oy 3 VA Angle 4 Frequency Create Meter Panel Reset selections Service Entrance Rms Voltage A Active Power C click to display parameters in dial type readings Properties Set Point Color Value Active Only items in black lettering will be saved as preferences Clear Preferences Set as Preference DK Apply Cancel click to display the Set Point dialog box The following are the reference points when using the Set Point color drop down menus The 1st set point color originates from the bottom left of the dial while the 2nd set point color applies from the 1st going clock wise The 4th set point color originates from the top right of the dial while the 3rd set point color applies from the 4th going coun terclockwise Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Real time Page 3j Meter Panel The Meter Panel real time display consists of a table showing the parameters being measured by the DataNode for each of its channels It is updated approximately every five seconds Some power measurement information for a Service Entrance DataNode is shown in the sample Meter Panel table below Z Real time Meters View Microsoft Internet Explorer Service_Entrance
4. Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz B ll and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement The Basic Tab is used to select a module type and set the Module address The following ADAM modules are supported 4000 Series 4017 8 Channel Analog Input 4018 8 Channel Thermocouple General Analog Input 4018M 8 Channel Thermocouple General Analog Input with memory 4050 7 Channel Digital Input 8 Channel Digital Output Output not supported 4052 8 Channel Digital Input 6 differential 2 single ended 4053 16 Channel Digital Input 4080 2 Channel Counter Frequency Module up down counter mode only 5000 Series 5000 4 Slot Chassis 5000E 8 Slot Chassis 5017 8 Channel Analog Input 5018 7 Channel Thermocouple General Analog Input 5050 16 Channel Digital Input Output Output not supported 5051 16 Channel Digital Input Output 5052 8 Channel Isolated Digital Input 5080 4 Channel Counter Frequency Module up down counter mode only The ADAM Module dropdown property allows selection of the desired module from the available module types The Module Address property is used to specify the RS 485 address where ADAM 4000 series modules will be found For ADAM 5000 series modules this is the address of the 5000 or 5000e chassis The 5000 Series Slot Number is used to indicate the position of the module in the chassis Positions start at 0 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide ADAM Handler Setup 3
5. QOS Compliance Query Screen 10 11 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS QOS Compliance Summary Table and Table of Contents The QOS Compliance table shown below displays the 5560 DataNodes and time intervals specified in the QOS Compliance Query screen A check sign indicates the availability of a report for the DataNode in the specified interval The check sign is color coded green means the DataNode is compliant during the specified interval red means the DataNode is non compliant during the specified interval gray means undetermined since evaluation status is still incom plete The X sign indicates the inavailability of a compliance report the interval specified in the query screen is not available for the DataNode device Select and click on a check sign to produce the desired QOS Compliance Summary Report The report is summarily presented in Table of Contents format wherein content data appear in hyperlinks See sample QOS Compliance Table of Contents at the bottom of this page Compliance Smart Report Microsoft Internet Explorer Oo x Compliance Smart Report 44 10 2002 00 00 00 to 11 15 2002 15 26 34 Interval Date Time Edison SE 5560 11 11 2002 10 00 00 00 11 10 2002 17 15 00 00 Click on a Y Compliant Non Compliant or Undetermined to produce the desired QOS Compliance Report An indicates that this interval is not available for the de
6. 5571 DataNode The 5571 is an upgrade path for users of the 7100 PQNode who wish to access the InfoNode and its web based interface An inexpensive upgrade kit is available to convert existing 7100 PQNodes into 5571s for use in the Signature System The 5571 is available in two model types distinguished by their enlosures and connections to the circuit Model 5571 and Model 55718 ADAM Modules The Signature System readily interfaces with and acquires data from the popular Advantech ADAM 4000 and ADAM 5000 series data acquisition and control modules The ADAM 4000 series modules interface through RS 485 to an InfoNode The ADAM 5000 series system is a backplane configuration Any combination of 5000 series plug in modules may be used to monitor various types of applications The 5000 series 1s one of the most diverse and flexible DA amp C systems and is available in four or eight slot configurations Both are equipped with CPU Watchdog Timer RS 232 amp RS 485 x2 interfaces error checking system diagnostics and diagnostic display i71 GEkV DataNode GE s kV Vector Electricity Meter is the first of a new generation of electronic meters that extend functionality beyond the the bounds of traditional metering The kV Meter adds automatic installation verification plus power quality and cost of service measurements The kV Meter also improves traditional meter tasks by adding consoli dated forms 57 to 120 or 120 to 480 volt meas
7. 8 3 8 4 5530 5520 DataNode Setup When making voltage connections to a Single phase circuit use channel A differential inputs Neutral to ground measurements are recommended but not required for proper operation When making Split Phase measurements use both channels A and B for voltage and current connections The neutral is chosen as the reference for measurement purposes Neutral to ground measurements are recommended but not required for proper operation When using the Wye setup mode channels A B and C are connected to voltage and current The neutral is connected to common and is the reference for the three channels Neutral to ground measurements are recommended but not required for proper operation Various setups are possible when using the Delta setup mode For example the 3 Phase Delta uses voltage channels A B and C as differential inputs with channel A using source voltage A B channel B using B C and channel C using C A as the reference Use channels A B and C for current connections Neutral to ground measurements are recommended but not required for proper operation Refer to the Series 5500 DataNode User s Guide Chapter 2 Preparation for Use for illustrations of the different wiring configurations using DataNode 5520 and DataNode 5510 5530 STEADY STATE TRENDING allows for the periodic sampling of the voltage and or current waveforms For instance the Time between periodic samples allows users to set th
8. To display an additional parameter for a specific channel expand the tree to the necessary detail and then click on the item Click on the right arrow in the middle to move the channel parameter to the list of displayed data To move all channels of a given parameter at once to the display list highlight the parameter rather than the indi vidual channel then click on the right arrow key To remove a channel parameter from the display list highlight the parameter from the table on the right side then use the left arrow to move it out of the display list Once the selections have been made click on the APPLY button to see the results without exiting the selection window OK will exit the selection window and apply the changes CANCEL will exit the window without applying the selection changes Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Event List Detail The Event List shows a tabular display of the limit cross ing or threshold triggered events that are displayed in the timeline see display screen below The data associated with an event depends on the type of DataNode and type of event Key features of the Event List Detail include 1 The Event List table shows the Time date of the event Event Type Channel phase and Characteristic descrip tion of the event The description may contain additional information such as minimum maximum values duration frequency and category 2 Events are listed fro
9. ner Radial Fault Location Copyright 1999 2004 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement ADAM 4060 tab Operation of the ADAM 4060 The ADAM communications handler is available to all parts of the InfoNode system through the Communications Manager The handler is configured to use a specific serial port on the InfoNode When a request for connection to an ADAM module is received the handler attempts to open the specified port at 9600 8 N 1 Once a connection is made the application may issue commands that send data to the 4060 based on the logic sense and contact pulse time parameters The connection attempts to verify that the command is completed If the module reports an error condition the error condition is reported back as part of the function return If positive or if no response is detected the connection attempts to restore the relay state to normal 0 for positive logic and for negative ADAM Instrument Handler Setup See Chapter 12 ADAM Handler Setup for a detailed discussion on how to set up the individual InfoNode ADAM instru ment handler Programming of individual modules are accomplished via switch settings on the modules themselves Refer to the ADAM 4000 Series User s Manual for more details on how to configure set up and install the ADAM modules The Windows driver and the Utility disk for the ADAM 4000 Series are shipped along with the ADAM 4000 Seri
10. Floating Base The nominal value is the average value over the specified update interval Frequency Deviation A change in the power frequency lasting from several cycles to several hours Ground The point at which other portions of a circuit are refer enced when making measurements Power systems grounding is that point to which the neutral conductor safety ground and building ground are connected This grounding electrode may be a water pipe driven ground rod or the steel frame of the building High Limit Set point or threshold above the normal range High High or Very High Limit Set point or threshold above the high limit Hz Hertz The frequency of alternating current The term Hertz 1s synonymous with cycles per second Harmonic A frequency that is a multiple of the fundamental frequen cy For example 120 Hz is the seond harmonic of 60 Hz 180 Hz is the third harmonic and so forth Harmonic Distortion Excessive distortion in the voltage or current waveform that introduces harmonic frequencies Harmonic distortion can be caused by electronic loads drawing current in non sinusoidal waveshapes It can shorten equipment life and cause serious safety problems by overheating transformers and conductors Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Hysteresis An amount by which a threshold is altered to suppress disturbance graphs that would otherwise be triggered by small fluctuations in the measured signal If
11. PT Primary allows for setting the primary component of all the transducer ratios Ratios for all three phases are set when this field is changed and saved If the values for the individual phases are different the phase A setting is dis played No setup values are changed unless the user mod ifies this field and saves the changes The values being modified here are the same as the individual values on the Transducers page For a 5560 DataNode the default PT Primary value is 1 0 if the Voltage Class is Low and Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 120 0 if the Voltage class is Medium 120 1 with 10V nominal input is for monitoring 13kV distribution voltage PT Secondary allows for setting the secondary compo nent of all the transducer ratios Ratios for all three phases A B C are set when this field is changed and saved If the values for the individual phases are different when using custom setups the phase A setting is displayed No setup values are changed unless the user modifies this field and saves the changes The values being modified here are the same as the individual values on the Transducers page The default value is 1 0 in all cases Declared Voltage also known as Nominal Voltage in a 5530 DataNode is where users specify the nominal input line voltage For a 5560 DataNode the default is 230 0 when using Wye Configuration For Delta Configuration Declared Voltage is set to 400 if the Voltage Class is Low
12. Remove summary data aj I gt General Save Setup Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc AI rights reserved User Agreement Data General tab properties s Storage Storage setup is related to how much memory Space to keep free MB to add other software modules in the future and whether to Rebuild index or Rebuild query table to compact the memory Log The Log setup allows you to specify the number of additional days to keep each log entry type InfoNode activity User activity DataNode management Alarms before purging This mechanism is the same as that used for handling other purgeable data in the InfoNode Refer to Data setup for more information on purging data Right click on the Log setup tree item to access the Clear Log menu command Selecting this command removes all log entries stored in the InfoNode NOTE Only Admin users can configure the log settings and delete log entries Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page 71 Notifications The Notifications section is subdivided into Recipients and Senders Notifications allow the system to automatically inform users about specific events related to every DataNode connected to the InfoNode Notifications also inform users whether DataNode connection is lost or re established and when the InfoNode starts 3 Recipients Recipients define who will receive notifications The General tab contains p
13. Wear proper personal protective equipment including safety glasses and insulated gloves when making con nections to power circuits Hands shoes and floor must be dry when making any connection to a power line Make sure the unit is turned OFF before connecting probes to the rear panel Before each use inspect all cables for breaks or cracks in the insulation Replace immediately if defective Medidas de seguridad Las medidas de seguridad siguientes deber n observarse cuando se realice cualquier tipo de conexi n al instrumento Antes de hacer cualquier conexi n deber enchufarse el conector de seguridad verde a tierra Cuando se haga conexiones a circuitos el ctricos o a equipo de activaci n por pulso deber abrirse sus respectivas cajas de seguridad NO deber hacerse ninguna conexi n del instrumento en l neas el ctricas bajo tensi n Las conexiones deber n hacerse primero al instrumento y luego al circuito a ser monitorizado A hacer conexiones a circuitos el ctricos deber utilizar anteojos y guantes protectores Sus manos zapatos y el piso deber n estar secos en todo momento en que se haga una conexi n a un cable el c trico Verifique que la unidad est DESACTIVADA antes de conectar sondas en el panel posterior Previo a cada uso deber verificarse que los cables no est n rotos y que el material aislante no tenga rajaduras Reemplace de inmediato cualquier parte defectuosa Mesures
14. a 6 cycle intervals for 8 seconds 80 samples b 30 cycle intervals for 20 seconds 40 samples c 60 cycle intervals for 90 seconds 90 samples For 50 Hz systems a 5 cycle intervals for 8 seconds 80 samples b 25 cycle intervals for 20 seconds 40 samples c 50 cycle intervals for 90 seconds 90 samples Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS 4 Transients tab Number of post trigger cycles 2 Individual Channel Parameters A N Voltage B N Voltage C N Voltage N G Voltage A Current B Current C Current N Current phase to neutral or phase to phase values displayed here depend upon the Wiring Configuration set under the Basic tab Instantaneous limit enabled M Instantaneous limit 200 0 Waveform change limit enabled ivi Waveform change magnitude limit 10 0 Waveform change duration limit of cycle 10 0 Transients are disturbances which are shorter in duration than sags and swells There are two basic types of transients 1 impulsive transients commonly caused by lightning and load switching and 2 oscillatory transients often attributed to capacitor bank switching The DataNode program has extensive transient recording capabilities for all transient events using waveshape instantaneous peak and dual positive and negative high frequency peak detectors individually for each phase to neutral and phase to phase setting The instantaneous limit value is compared against the
15. sop Fas p EIC il of i COT EATEN COTH HERES 1 0 oa 2030 oeo tso 3080 Opes T Sene To Ne ME Transient Categories x x i gt tt eitti gt 2 gt l Af S es D H S A S en S cn i ew 1 1 QULA S n 5 Definition of the Category Event Characteristic 3 Transients The Transients table is a filtered version of the Event List only those events of Transient type are included Refer to Chapter 7 Setup Page Answer Module section for further discussions on the above topics 1 Help Much of what is written in this manual can be found in the Help option onscreen Expanding the Help tree will provide Views Topics and Index links 5 Views Topics The Views Topics page simply says that the user is cur rently in the Views page Four active buttons are found in this page Contents Index lt lt and gt gt These buttons present different ways to access the same Help informa tion The differences lay only in the way each button organizes and lists information The gt gt button brings the user forward to the next linked page The button brings the user backward to the previously linked page 3 Index The Index page operates exactly like the Index portion of a book Information is listed and categorized in alphabeti cal order Click any button from A to Z to show various relate
16. Betrieb und Wartung dieses Instruments d rfen nur von Fachpersonal durchgef hrt werden In dem nationalen Bestimmungen f r Elektrizit t wird ein Fachmann als eine Person bezeichnet welche mit der Bauweise und dem Betrieb des Ger tes sowie den dazugeh rigen Gefahren vertraut ist Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide iii safety Summary Definitions WARNING statements inform the user that certain conditions or prac tices could result in loss of life or physical harm CAUTION statements identify conditions or practices that could harm the Series 5500 its data other equipment or property NOTE statements call attention to specific information Symbols The following International Electrotechnical Commission IEC sym bols are marked on the top and rear panel in the immediate vicinity of the referenced terminal or device A Caution refer to accompanying documents this manual Alternating current ac operation of the terminal or device Direct current DC operation of the 7 terminal or device Protective conductor terminal Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide safety Summary Definiciones Las ADVERTENCIAS informan al usuario de ciertas condiciones o pr cticas que podr an producir lesiones mortales o da o f sico Las PRECAUCIONES identifican condiciones o pr cticas que podr an da ar la Series 5500 sus datos otros equipos o propiedad Las NOTAS llaman la atenci n
17. C N Current Interharmonic RMS C Voltaae TID RMS Normalized N G Current Interharmonic RMS N Voltaae Harmonic RMS A N IT Product A Voltaae Harmonic RMS B N IT Product B Voltaae Harmonic RMS C N IT Product C Voltaae Harmonic RMS N G IT Product N Voltaae Interharmonic RMS A N Current Crest Factor A Voltaae Interharmonic RMS B N Current Crest Factor B Voltaae Interharmonic RMS C N Current Crest Factor C Voltaae Interharmonic RMS N G Current Crest Factor N Voltaae TIF Fund Normalized A N Current Total Demand Distortion A Voltaae TIF Fund Normalized B N Current Total Demand Distortion B Voltaae TIF Fund Normalized C N Current Total Demand Distortion C Voltaae TIF Fund Normalized N G K Factor A Voltaae TIF RMS Normalized A N K Factor B Voltaae TIF RMS Normalized B N K Factor C Voltaae TIF RMS Normalized C N K Factor A Voltaae TIF RMS Normalized N G Transformer Deratina Factor A Voltaae Crest Factor A N Transformer Deratina Factor B Voltaae Crest Factor B N Transformer Deratina Factor C Voltaae Crest Factor C N Total Phase Harmonic Power A N Voltaae Crest Factor N G Total Phase Harmonic Power B N Current THD Fund Normalized A Total Phase Harmonic Power C N Current THD Fund Normalized B Sianed Phase Harmonic Power A N Current THD Fund Normalized C Sianed Phase Harmonic Power B N Current THD Fund Normalized N Sianed
18. Quality of Supply IEEE 1159 and EPRI DPQ Single Point Faxility Wide I T mm gt InfoNode P m DataNode Power Quality Panel Meter DataNodes THULE Revenue Transducer Internet Intranet Wide Arca Network Multiple Geographical Locations rr rc InfoNode InfoNode on PC on PC EPQ DataNode DataNodes DataNode Quality of Supply Signature System PC InfoNode Architecture A Conceptual Illustration Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 1 1 1 2 PC InfoNode Overview A Virtual InfoNode on PC Once the InfoNode on PC software package is loaded onto a PC or laptop with the required Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating system the InfoNode program runs as a typical Windows service PC InfoNode converts the computer into a web server that enables you to browse data and information collected by Signature System The InfoNode service will operate for a period of 30 days upon installation To continue to use the service after the trial period you must install a hardware lock called HASP on your computer NOTE THAT YOU MUST INSTALL THE INFONODE SOFTWARE BEFORE YOU INSTALL THE HASP The HASP is connected to the USB port in the computer See InfoNode on PC with HASP on page 2 10 for more information Once the InfoNode service is installed and running and the required HASP driver is properly installed in the computer access to InfoNode
19. Reverse clockwise Channel Mapping Phase A voltage Phase A current Phase B voltage Phase B current Phase C voltage Phase C current Neutral voltage Neutral current Signal is connected to Channel 1 Channel is inverted Hi Transducer Ratios Phase A N VT Phase B N VT Phase C N VT Neutral VT PhaseA CT Phase B CT Phase C CT Neutral CT Phase A B VT Phase B C VT Phase C A VT Transducer Primary 1 00000000 phase to neutral or phase to phase values displayed depend upon the Wiring Configuration set under the Basic tab Transducer Secondary 1 00000000 Magnitude correction 1 00000000 Phase correction 0 00000000 DC offset 0 00000000 Transducers are typically PTs potential transformers and CTS current transformers that are used to interface the instrument to the power circuit PTs allow the instrument to measure circuits that are not within the measurement range of the instrument CTs measure the current of the circuit and convert it to within the measurement range of the instrument For Phase rotation users can choose whether to have phasor shift clockwise or counterclockwise depending on the way they have set up their system Click the value field to display the drop down menu featuring Normal counter clockwise or Reverse clockwise Either orientation will yield the same mathematical calculations of voltage and current measurements The 5560 is able to automatically determine p
20. STARFI 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 Query and Aggregation Parameters Monitoring Days Method Estimated Index Normalization 30 days Monitor Days in query 5 actual range 5 Characterization Level Temporal Aggregation Worst Case Method Min Aggregation Time 60 RBM Sag Index Report H09 5530 09 01 2001 00 00 00 to 09 05 2001 11 07 51 admin Sample RBM Sag Index Report This report is generated using the RBM Aggregation Parameters and the query information described above For more information on the RBM Aggregation Parameters see page 7 26 of Chapter 7 Setup Page The RBM Sag Index Report calculates the indices listed below for 90 80 70 50 and 10 voltage thresholds Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5 7 5 8 Reports Page 3 Aggregated Energy Expense The Aggregated Energy Expense features a query setup to enable users to generate a comparative expense report for different DataNodes Data is only available when the Energy Usage Answer Module is installed nez Signature System InfoNode Home f Reports Real time p Aggregated Energy Expense Report Display Display in New Window DataNodes H09_5530 H08 5540 v Range TN C From 2002 11 19 00 00 00 to 2002 11 19 16 38 46 Compare C Aggregate Only Rate Structure Rate Structure 1 z Comparison DataNode H09_5540 ode Summary H09_5571 v Module variation Indices Refresh this page to update the se
21. Standard Reports Quality of Supply Quality of Supply Report is an analysis of the voltage similar to the requirements of the EN50160 which specifies that various parameters must be within a specified percentage for 95 of the time Users can select from an analysis of the Voltage Regulation Unbalance and Frequency with the information presented as a trend and or histogram The screen below shows the standard query selection for Quality of Supply Report Once DataNode Date Time range Data to Plot and Plot type selections have been made click on the Display or Display in New Window button A table of contents featuring data trends in hyperlinks will appear as shown at the bottom of this page QOS Regulation Trend and Frequency Trend link to the same graphs as that of RMS Voltage and Frequency respectively under Views Smart Trends see pages 10 9 thru 10 10 Pur Signature System InfoNode Reports Real time Setup Quality Of Supply Report Display Display in New Window DataNodes Edison 5571 Edison SE 5530 Edison SE 556084 vent r Range Today eem Top 10 Event C From 11 15 2002 00 00 00 to 11 15 2002 7 20 18 f Standard Repo Event Summaries Data to Plot Iv Regulation Iv Frequency Plot Types Iv Trend Iv Histogram Specify Report Headings UP 0 Fault Location Refresh this page to update the selection control contents and seleqt default values RBM Ag ated RMS Event List Select
22. The user may choose to divide the time range into smaller increments under the Increment window Then enter the reference period in which you want to compare the current usage against under the Start of Comparison Period NOTE If the reference period has more days than the current period then it will be reduced to the number of days in the current period The start time will remain as selected 5 12 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page A sample Energy Usage Comparison report is shown below The report is divided into three sections Energy Usage kWHr Energy Usage kvarHr and Demand Max kW Each section displays the current usage vis a vis the percent change from the refernce period for On Peak time Partial Peak time Off Peak time and Total A negative number indicates that the current usage is smaller than that of the reference period IE Energy Usage Comparison Report Microsoft Internet Explorer H09 5530 DRANETZ Range for Comparsion 2002 10 19 00 00 00 to 2002 10 19 16 51 54 2002 11 19 00 00 00 to 2002 11 19 BMI Increment Weekly 16 51 54 3 Energy Usage Comparison Energy Usage kWHr From __ Days Current Usage Percent Change Percent Change Current Usage Percent Change Percent Change 2002 11 19 o wes T e2 Energy Usage kvarHr Percent Change percent Change Percent Change 2002 11 19 _ 0 oof 0 J 0 oo 1 25
23. Warranty Dranetz BMI warrants that the PC InfoNode will be free from defects in workmanship and materials for a period of one year from the date of purchase Dranetz BMI will without charge replace or repair at its option any warranted product returned to the Dranetz BMI factory service department Dranetz BMI shall not be held liable for any consequential damages including without limitation damages resulting from loss of use or damages resulting from the use or misuse of this product Some states do not allow limitations of incidental or consequential damages so the above limitation or exclusion may not apply to you This warranty gives you specific rights and you may also have rights which vary from state to state Exclusions This warranty does not apply in the event of misuse or abuse of the product or as a result of unauthorized repairs or alterations Need Help How to Contact Dranetz BMI Regardless of your location Dranetz BMI sales and product support are within easy reach through an established network of representatives and distributors worldwide For Sales Technical Support or the name of a Dranetz BMI Sales Representative in your area call 1 800 372 6832 or 732 287 3680 Fax 732 248 1834 Web site www dranetz bmi com Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Welcome to the Signature System PC InfoNode Congratulations on your purchase of the Signature System PC InfoNode The InfoNode th
24. 00 Demand Max kW rom pays Current max kW Percent Change Percent Change Percent Change Percent Change Sample Energy Usage Comparison Report 5 13 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 4 Reports Page 5 14 3 UPS Verification UPS Verification Report Display Display in New Window Range Today C From 09 1 3 2001 00 00 00 to 09 1 3 2001 09 40 22 UPS DataNode Pairs Demo Specify Report Headings E mE Refresh this page to update the selection control contents and select default values Select date time range of interest Click on the Display or the Display in New Window button to initiate the query The results will appear either in this window or a new window depending on the button you click Setup Screen for UPS Verification Report NOTE SARFI System Average RMS Variation Frequency Index SIARFI System Instantaneous Average RMS Variation Frequency Index SMARFI System Momentary Average RMS Variation Frequency Index STARFI System Temporary Average RMS Variation Frequency Index This report has a different query setup than the standard query setup This report is produced for defined instrument pairs The instrument pairs were created under the Setup tab for the UPS Verification Answer Module The query setup for the UPS Verification report is shown above As with other reports a date range or a start and end time need to be specified Howeve
25. 029 s 1 76 cyc Sample UPS Verification Report 5 15 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 4 Reports Page 5 16 Demo 200 ITIC 150 7 T v m m a 100 7 3 a e cc 50 0 6 touring Foro tore bog or rrr rg bPOororggrrrg EO p rrr 0 0 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 Time Seconds Input B Output Sample UPS Mag Dur plot Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page 3 Fault Location This report requires no additional query parameters It allows for the selection of multiple DataNodes The information required for this Answer Module can be seen in page 7 24 of Chapter 7 Setup Page The module computes distance to fault for all possible balance and unbalance faults i e three phase fault single line to ground SLG fault of phases A B and C double line to ground DLG faults of phases AB BC and CA and line to line to ground LLG of phases AB BC and CA Thus there are ten types of faults considered The distance to faults are estimated using two different equations therefore there are two estimates lower and upper for each fault type A sample report is shown below EN NT CDRWest BMI 000 MaryRosenbalt Radial Fault Report Event Time Monitor Characteristics Mag Dur Fault Type Lower Distance Estimate Upper Distance Estimate 12 28 1999 13 49 11 CDRWest Mag 19797 24V Duration 0 17 secs 3 Phase Fault 2044 in 1000 f 20 44
26. 09 26 H09_5530 Transient reci Dur 7 423 ms 0 45 cyc Frequency 300 Hz Upstream Capacitor 43 oltage A RET Switching na Mag 406 V 1 04pu Max Deviation Peak to Peak 84 V 0 21pu INCLUIR H 9 5530 Transient instantaneous Dur 7 555 ms 0 45 cyc Frequency 323 Hz Direction Unknown 05 01 09 90 Voltage C N anta Capacitor Switching na Mag 489 1 25pu Max Deviation Peak to Peak 243 V 0 62pu 2002 09 26 H09_5530 Transient eroe b Dur 3 385 ms 0 20 cyc Frequency 2 415 Hz Category 3 ltage B cubos Upstream Capacitor Switching Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz Blvll and Blectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement The event Characteristics include magnitude duration frequency and category The categories are defined according to the graph explained next NOTE If there are too many events in the selected range to be displayed in a timely manner the most recent 500 events will be displayed along with the message more data is selected than can be displayed This also applies to any of the other Views 33 RMS Variations The RMS Variations table is a filtered version of the Event List It includes only those events of RMS variation type sags swells and interruptions Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 4 10 Views Page RMS Categories ALB iL prd b ewe 5 ITNT ITN ITNT HN I E ss 88 ss
27. 64 009 hosts remember that 0 127 and 255 cannot be used on each Class B network An example of a Class B IP Address is 129 10 0 0 with a Subnet Mask of 255 255 0 0 Class C Class C is for small networks where the first octet is of the form 110xxxxx which can range from 192 to 223 The network address consists of the first three octets allowing 1 984 279 different Class C networks with only 253 hosts per network An example of a Class C IP Address is 192 168 1 0 with a Subnet Mask of 255 255 255 0 Other Classes The IP specification states that addresses whose first octet have the form 111xxxxx are extended addresses reserved for future use Since the first three classes were defined Class D Multicast was added to the list The Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of the IP address space for private networks Class A 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 10 8 prefix Class B 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 172 16 12 prefix Class C 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 192 168 16 prefix Note that by definition these test network addresses are not routable on the Internet Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Appendix Glossary Amp Ampere The quantitative unit measurement of electrical current Angle between Phases The phase angle between the Phase Fundamental Voltage and Current at power line Frequency Apparent Phase Power RMS voltage RMS current on per phase basis A
28. Clear 332 Database and reboot Do both of the above Dont save data from next download Clear last journal ID One Time Firmware mE CAUTION These operations will Sp new firmware to the DataNode Load IOP 302 firmware Load ACP 332 firmware 5 Load both IOP 302 and ACP 332 firmware Load both to all DataNodes 10 44 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Parameters under the Advanced tab allow the administrator or user to set up functions that affect communications information access and download between the InfoNode and DataNode systems The 5560 can be configured to issue a UDP cross trigger broadcast message when RMS variation and or Transient occurs The 5560 can also be configured to listen for such messages and cause RMS variation or transient recording to occur regardless of whether or not its own trigger condi tions for that instrument were met Under CROSS TRIG GERING a Broadcast Group ID is assigned to allow for different groups of cross trigger senders recipients The broadcast ID number in the InfoNode must match the broadcast group ID set under the TCP IP parameter of the Datanode The DataNode also uses this ID mechanism for multiple DataNode cross triggering and is guaranteed only on an un routed network The group ID is sent along with the broadcast message and only those receivers with the same group ID will respond to the broadcast 1f so enabled The broadcast address can be specified to send a broadcas
29. DataNode Model type Serial number and software Version 3 1 3 2 Home Page Home Views Reports Real time where DataNode Setup where users settings are displayed in view and or customize meaningful format the Datanode settings miro pi o oignature System InfoNode reports IME e Rep Real time Setup Welcome back admin to InfoNode The time is 07 23 2002 11 27 45 You were last logged on at 07 23 2002 10 57 25 The InfoNode is connected to 3 DataNodes All DataNodes are in good health The database is 74 full There are 1026 disturbances Since your last time here no disturbances have been logged In tfe 48 hours 5 disturbances have been logged 3 DataNodes are reporting Quality of Supply non compliance DataNode information DataNode health status Quality of Supply Compliance There are 3 DataNodes All DataNodes are in good health 74 used 3762 KB out of 5125 KB 1026 HM _ oze1e 2002 12 19 40 n 07 23 2002 03 16 50 by DataNode TechSupport 4560 disturbances I For the current compliance interval the following IpataNodes are not in compliance e Edison Service Entrance 5560 and the following DataNodes have an undetermined compliance status e Joes133 TechSupport 5560 InfoNode information InfoNode 5502 Serial number 00 01 45 00 16 A4A Firmware version 2 6 13 Beta Uptime D days 4 hours 25 minutes
30. DataNode User s Guide for more detailed information about connections and setups A 5540 Series DataNode Recommended Setup before connecting to an InfoNode The 5540 DataNode must be programmed from its front panel to properly communicate with the InfoNode To enter the program mode see the DataNode 5540 User s Guide The communications should be set as follows 8 BIT EVEN 9600 baud XON XOFF BINARY RS232 ADDRESS x where x matches the value setup in the InfoNode for that 5540 If using RS232 or RS485 the cables between the InfoNode and 5540 must go though a null modem that is transmit and receive must be interchanged as well as interchanging the positive and negative lines for both transmit and receive Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5540 DataNode Setup Q Specifications for 5540 EM DataNode Measurements 23 parameters including true RMS voltage and current kVA kW PF frequency kVAR kWh kVAh kVARh current demand kVA demand kW demand Voltages 3 phase L L or L N 660 Vrms L L 500 Vrms L N FS 45 65 Hz fundamental accuracy 0 3 RDG FS for 10 120 FS Currents 3 phase 5 Arms or 1 Arms FS accuracy 0 3 RDG FS for 2 120 FS Instrument Power 96 138 Vac 185 250 Vac 50 60 Hz 10 Va Enclosure Environments ABS panel mount cutout 92x92mm 3 375 square screw terminal connections for voltage and current operating 209C to 60 C 0 95 RH non condensing Front
31. Demand Period min 15 Average Buffer Size 8 entries Front Panel Reset Enabled Phase A RMS wa L L or L G Enabled High High Threshold High Threshold Low Threshold Low Low Threshold 120 000 110 000 90 000 80 000 Phase B RMS ah L L or L G 120 000 110 000 90 000 Enabled Low Threshold Low Low Threshold Phase C RMS Voltage L L or L G M 120 000 Enabled High High Threshold High Threshold 110 000 Low Threshold 90 000 Low Low Threshold 80 000 Phase A RMS Curent Amps Enabled M High High Threshold 24 000 High Threshold 20 000 Low Threshold 5 000 Low Low Threshold 0 000 Phase B RMS Current Amps Enabled Rl High High Threshold High Threshold Low Threshold Low Low Threshold 24 000 20 000 5 000 0 000 Phase C RMS erem Amps Enabled Low Threshold 5 000 Low Low Threshold 0 000 Advanced tab screen display continued next page 9 5 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 0 5540 DataNode Setup continued Phase A Active Power kW Enabled 0 High High Threshold 5750 000 High Threshold 4420 000 Low Threshold 985 000 Low Low Threshold 0 000 Phase B Active Power kW Enabled d High High Threshold 5750 000 High Threshold 4420 000 Low Threshold 985 000 Low Low Threshold 0 000 Phase C Active Power kW Enabled d High High Threshold 5750 000 High Threshold 4420 000 Low Threshold 985 000 Low Low Threshold 0 000 Total Active Power kW
32. Dials enable you to define the parameters and create dial type readings of each enabled DataNode parameter The readings are updated at approximately once per second After selecting the parameters and creating the meter panel the attributes of the meter panel can be changed by right clicking the mouse button when the cursor is over the dial Three categories can be selected General contains options for changing color of the background and the needle Axis contains options for changing min max limits label and line color and text font Set Points contains options for changing color value and active status In the sample screens found next page parameter values for a Service Entrance DataNode have been checked after which the Create Meter Panel button was clicked This resulted in the screen showing dial type readings Right clicking on the dials shows Properties for General Axis and Set Point options A sample Set Point display screen also appears next page For a 5560 DataNode new parameters are defined to support real time display of flicker measurements These parame ters are required to meet the specification of a flicker meter See page 10 20 for more information 6 1 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 6 2 Real time Page 75 Real time Meters View Microsoft Internet Explorer Service Entrance N Total LH Average r r x Rms Voltage qao Rms Current Active Power
33. Enabled High High Threshold High Threshold Low Threshold Low Low Threshold Enabled High High Threshold High Threshold Low Threshold Low Low Threshold Enabled High Threshold Low Threshold Low Low Threshold Enabled Low Threshold Low Low Threshold Li 17250 000 13260 000 2955 000 0 000 Phase A Reactive Power kvar 0 000 0 000 9 6 Advanced tab screen display continued next page Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5540 DataNode Setup 0 continued Total Reactive Power kvar Enabled High High Threshold High Threshold 0 000 Low Threshold 0 000 Low Low Threshold 0 000 Phase A Apparent Power kva Enabled H High High Threshold High Threshold Low Threshold 5750 000 4420 000 985 000 Low Low Threshold 0 000 Phase B Apparent Power kva Enabled d High High Threshold 5750 000 High Threshold 4420 000 Low Threshold 985 000 Low Low Threshold 0 000 Phase C Apparent Power kva L1 5750 000 4420 000 985 000 Enabled High High Threshold High Threshold Low Threshold Low Low Threshold 0 000 Total Apparent Power kva Enabled High High Threshold 17250 000 High Threshold 13260 000 Low Threshold 2955 000 Low Low Threshold 0 000 Enabled Low Threshold Low Low Threshold Enabled O Low Threshold 0 000 Low Low Threshold 0 000 Phase C Power Factor PU Enabled Low Thr
34. High limit enabled High limit Low limit enabled Low limit Low Low limit enabled Low Low limit Deadband enabled Li Deadband 2 50 Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a check box in the value field opposite Basic Metering The box enables the trending of values listed in Metering page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are per sisted but are not in effect Apparent Power A Apparent power B Apparent Power C Total Apparent Power Power Factor A Power Factor B Power Factor C Average Power Factor Angle Between Phases A Angle Between Phases B Angle Between Phases C Frequency o O phase to neutral or phase to phase values displayed here depend upon the Wiring Configuration set under the Basic tab Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE the various phase to neutral and phase to phase parameters are displayed High and low limits can be enabled and individually set for each phase to neutral and phase to phase value Note however that the available phase values depend on the Wiring Configuration selected under the Basic Tab For instance for wye circuits L N Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide N G and L L limits can be set For delta circuits only L L limits can be set Highlight the phase value parameter you wish to change then check the enable box Check the threshold enable box and
35. Hosts use these addresses to send each IP packet along to its final destination Routing is the process of deciding how a particular packet travels to its final destination There are several classes of IP addresses as defined by the IETF Internet Engineering Task Force Class A very large networks Class B large networks Class C small networks Class D multicast Class E reserved future use There are two parts to an IP address Where the division takes place depends on the network class The first part of the address 1s the network address the remaining part is the host address Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Appendix F Class A Class A is for very large networks The first octet is of the form Oxxxxxxx which means it can range from 1 to 126 Networks of this type use only the first octet as the network address This means there can only be 126 Class A Networks The remaining portion the next 3 octets or 24 bits form the host address This allows 16 194 277 computers on a Class A network An example of a Class A IP Address is 10 0 0 0 with a Subnet Mask of 255 0 0 0 Class B Class B is for large networks It is common for universities to have Class B addresses assigned to them The first octet has the form 10xxxxxx which can range from 128 to 191 The definition of network address for Class B is the first two octets which allows 16 382 Class B networks The last two octets form the host address allowing
36. PASS or FAIL status is not hyperlinked Refer to page 10 5 for the description of each column heading found in the Compliance Summary table below F Compliance Summary Report Microsoft Internet Explorer mf x Edison SE 5560 11 11 2002 10 00 00 to 11 15 2002 15 30 00 admin Compliance Summary Report Compliance Summary RMS Variation Transient Event Event Count Count Evaluation Evaluation Status Period 11 11 2002 Edison SE 10 00 00 00 5560 Monitor Compliance Incomplete Pass 0 1 lt lt Previous lt lt TOC 12345678 gt gt Next gt gt 10 13 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 10 14 5560 QOS 2 Compliance Graph The Compliance Graph displays the seven parameters that are required for determining compliance The bars indicate the percentage of the intervals passing the specified compliance criteria A green bar indicates that the parameter is within compliance A red bar indicates that the parameter does not comply with EN50160 Standard Unlike the Compliance Statistical Bar Chart see page 10 6 accessible from Views users cannot click on the bar as if it is a link Refer to page 10 6 for the description of each parameter contained in the graph below E Compliance Summary Report Microsoft Internet Explorer Edison SE 5560 DRANETZ 11 11 2002 10 00 00 to m 0 ITE UU BMI Compliance Summary Repor
37. Phase Harmonic Power C N Current THD RMS Normalized A Current THD RMS Normalized B Current THD RMS Normalized C Current THD RMS Normalized N High High limit enabled H High High limit Low limit enabled oO Low limit 105 0 Deadband enabled m Deadband 3 0 8 18 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup a Harmonics are waveform distortion a steady state deviation from an ideal power frequency sinusoid and is characterized by the spectral content of the waveform Many non linear devices such as battery chargers switching power supplies or transformers inject currents at harmonic integer multiples of the fundamental frequencies into the system Harmonic currents and the voltage distortion they create as they flow through system impedances can reduce equipment operating reliability and service life Harmonics can be particularly troublesome where capacitors are applied on the distribution system Capacitors may result in resonance at a harmonic frequency leading to high harmonic voltages and currents throughout the system Interharmonics are frequency components between the harmonic frequencies The IEC 1000 4 7 Standard dictates that harmonic analysis is done using 5Hz bins The RMS of the frequency bins between the 2nd and 3rd harmonic is referred to as the H5 3 interharmonic Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a checkbox in the value field opposite Harmonics The box e
38. Programming of individual modules are accomplished via switch settings on the modules themselves This handler supports both the 4000 and 5000 series modules from Advantech The 4000 series consists of stand alone modules where each module is assigned a unique RS 485 address between 1 and 254 The 5000 series uses a single chassis to hold 4 or 8 modules The chassis is assigned a single RS 485 address and the individual modules are addressed by slot number within the chassis Note that the ADAM 5000 chasis can communicate with the InfoNode via RS 485 requires external adaptor or RS 232 ADAM Module Connection Setup The following are required to setup and configure an ADAM environment ADAM Modules A host computer such as an IBM PC AT that can output ASCII characters with an RS 232 or RS485 port Power supply for the ADAM Modules 10 and 30 VDC ADAM Series Utility software ADAM Isolated RS 232 RS 485 Converter optional ADAM Repeater optional Host Computer Any computer or terminal that can output in ASCII format over either RS 232 or RS 485 can be con nected as the host computer When only RS 232 is available an ADAM RS 232 RS 485 Converter 1s required to trans form the host signals to the correct RS 485 protocol Since this module is not addressable by the host the baud rate must be set using a switch inside the module The factory default setting is 9600 baud The converter also provides opto isola tion and transformer based is
39. RMS A Current Harmonic RMS B A B C N Voltage TID RMS Normalized A N Current Harmonic RMS C Voltage TID RMS Normalized B N Current Harmonic RMS N Voltage TID RMS Normalized C N Current Interharmonic RMS A Voltage TID RMS Normalized N G Current Interharmonic RMS B Voltage Harmonic RMS A N Current Interharmonic RMS C Voltage Harmonic RMS B N Current Interharmonic RMS N Voltage Harmonic RMS C N IT Product A Voltage Harmonic RMS N G IT Product B Voltage Interharmonic RMS A N IT Product C Voltage Interharmonic RMS B N IT Product N Voltage Interharmonic RMS C N Current Crest Factor A Voltage Interharmonic RMS N G Current Crest Factor B Voltage TIF Fund Normalized A N Current Crest Factor C Voltage TIF Fund Normalized B N Current Crest Factor N Voltage TIF Fund Normalized C N Current Total Demand Distortion A Voltage TIF Fund Normalized N G Current Total Demand Distortion B Voltage TIF RMS Normalized A N Current Total Demand Distortion C Voltage TIF RMS Normalized B N K Factor A Voltage TIF RMS Normalized C N K Factor B Voltage TIF RMS Normalized N G K Factor C Voltage Crest Factor A N K Factor A Voltage Crest Factor B N Transformer Derating Factor A Voltage Crest Factor C N Transformer Derating Factor B Voltage Crest Factor N G Transformer Derating Factor C Current THD Fund Normalized A Curre
40. RU HRS mes EEE EE EE AAEE EEEN 9 5 10 5560 QOS Hiringoro li rejoTo nte I 10 1 Scope of EN50160 Standard ise saneti i 10 1 5560 DataNode QOS Functional Components sese 10 1 5560 DataNode Specifications sse 10 2 Home Page Reporting of QOS Compliance esee 10 3 QOS cru 10 4 QOS Status QUERY 3nd ii eei ere ito Ode i eer ERE 10 4 OOS Status SUITE certi tior e ee tese ete aote tet geste ses perdes doe sevi bem este iua ens 10 5 Compliance Statistical Graph essent teeth 10 6 Harmonic Compliance Limit Values eene 10 7 Compliance Limits in QOS Setup and Reports sss 10 8 Smart VIC WS auia e ERR BRUIT IINE ODIT HRS heen UE 10 9 Smart Menderes ener uma Ui LATIS 10 9 Timeline Graphs for Smart Trends sse 10 10 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Contents OOS Compliance Reports irre ERU ECRIRE RD RR GE E 10 11 Smar Reporisuontiborres a Dust oe iiti eti deest uuu t cei decre Eas 10 11 QOS Compliance Summary Table and Table of Contents 10 12 OOS Compliance Reports rrr rte te ete ete better 10 13 Standard Reportts 5 5 inet HG WR ER EEG E GREIFEN EUER 10 19 Quality of Supply nien reed epe rie ed ceu 10 19 Real time Display Of QOS D t trennen tired reri ep bre 10 20 5560 DataNode System Setup iHe Hr PUER EUER PEERS ES 10 21 EN50160 G
41. Statement ient iid ee OG tette teo tee ix War aenor rinan M EP X Need Help 54st HR UO HH A EURET UR THEE EUER CELULAR X Welcome to the Signature System PC InfoNode sss xi 1 PC InfoNode Overview Signature System InfoNode on PC sse 1 1 A Virtual Info Node on PG rn ELE ern e eer sud 1 2 PC InfoNode User Interface sseesseseeeenen eene 1 2 InfoNode Access Devels eet ei ti e oen ce tene 1 3 2 Preparation for use PC InfoNode Software Package 2 1 Contents siucsetene etie devs ones neenon endi a re ts 2 1 System Requiremierits s voci tee e EU ERE ORT ENS PEE Hle ru ege 2 1 InfoNode on PC Installation and Setup sss 2 1 Getting Started i oap edm EE o PEG DERE EH t e etas 2 1 Signature System InfoNode Setup 2 2 Communicating with the InfoNode on PC 2 5 Time Service Installation and Setup seen 2 6 Getting Started oca ome ta te e E E n enit re 2 6 Tardis 2000 Time Server Setup 2 7 PG InfoNode with HASD api redee xe EHE cei pu e EORR ERE 2 10 3 Home Page WO SLT ys 3 1 liu Vul E 3 1 IntoNOdEe Satis acero bo ve st I EPI ae Ren GERD SE en e eA I eode eds 3 1 DataNode Infortriationi 3 1i etesaee iie een IO EE ee Dien ient 3 1 InfoNode Informat OT 5 eco pero tetto ote rtr Eee Enn Ee oeste cH tede 3 3 le m H
42. Zero Seq Method Enable periodic sampling o High High threshold enabled Li High High threshold 135 0 High threshold enabled O High threshold 125 0 Low threshold enabled o Low threshold 105 0 Low Low threshold enabled L1 Low Low threshold a 0 Deadband enabled Values Deadband iss The voltage and current imbalance for each phase from the average value for all three phases can be trended and limits set The positive negative and zero sequence components for voltage and current can be trended Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a checkbox in the value field opposite Unbalance and Sequence Components The box enables the trending of values listed in Unbalance page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE highlight the parameter value you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit sp
43. absolute value of each A D sample of the voltage and current channel waveforms 128 A D samples taken per cycle Enter your limit values in the corresponding field for each phase or phase to phase setting and click the Instantaneous limit enabled box to activate Under CYCLE COUNTS the user can define a number of cycles of waveform to record prior to the trigger point This is set under Number of pre trigger cycles Users can also define the number of cycles of waveform to record after the trigger This value is set under Number of post trigger cycles Typical values for these settings are 1 and 2 respectively Other configuration variables that determine the opera tion of transient capture capability of the DataNode are the waveform trigger parameter instantaneous peak waveform trigger level and dual peak high frequency detector output trigger level Values for these parameters are set under Waveform change magnitude limit and Waveform change duration limit Limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for each phase to Under INDIVIDUAL CHANNEL PARAMETERS letters A B and C represent different channels N stands for neutral while G stands for ground conductor The channel values are pre defined and automatically set depending upon the Wiring Configuration selected under the Basic tab The DataNode program provides configuration variables that specifies how many cycles to record the RMS Instantaneous limit and Waveform
44. accumu lated graph Axis Properties for the Timeline will allow you to change the title fonts scaling for the horizontal time axis label characteristics for the vertical axis and grid color Print will print and save in PQDIF format Copy Image will save the displayed timeline to a new window clipboard as a GIF file This can then be saved to any folder using the standard browser File Save As com mand Copy Data will allow you to copy the data that makes up the graph to the clipboard Data can then be pasted into applications such as Excel Channels channnels to be displayed can be selected from the expanding tree Full Scale will return to the original unzoomed data Zoom Out will undo the previous zoom To Add Remove Channel Parameters The Channel Selection box below allows the user to add or remove channels parameters from the graph If there is a plus sign then you can click on the plus sign to further expand the tree to show more options available A minus sign shows that the tree directory has already been fully expanded Clicking on the minus sign will collapse the tree back up one level Channel Selection ofl x Available Selected Channels AB Rms Voltage A EI Choose a channel or group of channels from the left and use the right arrow button to select To remove a channel from the selected list selectthe channel and use the left arrow to remove the channel
45. across the bottom of the page to select the appropriate category of programmable features Typically a DataNode includes such categories as General Basic RMS Variations and Advanced settings Users can change setups depending on their access privileges See page 7 29 for more General Guidelines on setting up DataNodes Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear Data is recorded based upon programmed settings and dis ww signature System InfoNode Reports Real time Setup DataNode address 198 69 18 134 played in Views page Real time page and Reports page Refer to the previous pages of this chapter as well as to the previous Chapters for more details on the Views Real time and Reports pages 5560 DataNode The setup of a DataNode is dependent on the DataNode type 5560 DataNodes can be set up in Strict compli ance with EN50160 or can be set up using Custom setups Under Strict compliance only the General and Basic tabs are visible and modifiable This is the stan dard method for using the 5560 For those who have unique applications requiring modification of the stan dard setups the Compliance Setup selection box on the Basic tab can be changed to Custom See sample screens below Password stude Power System Voltage Class Medium Voltage PT Primary 1 00000000 ettings ere 1 00000000 erModule ESIRCCNETTS 11000 0 haracterizer Wiring configu
46. amp 95 CPF 3 6 W 40 10 o i 2 mmn mENHZEL 7 AM Y o OK Oo 3 o o 086 MO e 000 e e A Average Cumulative Probability Dranetz B ll Bectrotek Concepts Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Views Page 3 Event Summary The Event Summary table seen below is a listing of the newest to oldest events in memory of the InfoNode for the DataNode selected The data contained in the table include the Event Time Date Monitor that recorded the event Event Type Phase channel and event Characteristics as found in the Event List details Click the Event Time Date in hyper links to display the Event Details Cw Signature System InfoNode Home LM Reports Real time Event Summary View 2002 09 26 00 00 00 to 2002 09 26 14 38 05 Event Time Monitor Event Type Channel Characteristics 2002 09 26 Instantaneous Mag 5 940 V 0 82pu Dur 16 66 ms 1 00 cyc Category 2 13 50 53 18 Eee Sag Rms Voltage A Downstream Sag 2002 09 26 Instantaneous Mag 233 V 0 84pu Dur 8 329 ms 0 50 cyc Category 2 12505314 409_8530 Sag Rms Voltage C Upstream Sag 2002 09 26 H09 5571 Transient Instantaneous Mag 451 7V 1 15pu Max Deviation Peak to Peak 132 3 13 50 51 49 Voltage C 0 34pu Dur 54 82 ms 3 29 cyc Frequency 593 Hz Category 2 no Mag 407 1 04pu Max Deviation Peak to Peak 103 V 0 26pu 2002
47. and to 11000 0 if the Voltage Class is Medium To set Wiring Configuration click on the value field and a drop down menu lists Single Phase Wye Delta and Split Single Phase The default wiring configuration is Delta Synchronized to Grid indicates that the system being monitored is not islanded isolated from the power grid The box is checked by default indicating that the system is synchronized not islanded 10 25 10 26 5560 QOS Compliance Setup is a drop down selection box contain ing two entries Strict EN50160 and Custom EN50160 Compliance setup determines which pages are visible to the user and therefore which setup fields may be changed If Strict EN50160 is selected only the General and Basic pages are displayed If Custom EN50160 is selected all Setup pages are visible Strict ENS0160 compliance setup is the default Under MAINS SIGNALLING users can enter Frequencies to Trend This value field is editable Use None if no frequency values will be trended or enter a delimited list of signalling frequencies to monitor using a comma to separate the frequency values Only the first five valid frequencies in the list are stored A valid fre quency is divisible by 5 Hz and is less than 3 84 kHz The Mains Signalling graph can be accessed from the Views page but the signalling frequency is not trended or available for real time meter Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 3 RMS Variations tab Pr
48. are available under ONE TIME FIRMWARE OPERATIONS A firmware is a program or instruction stored in Flash memory which implements the commu nications interface and data acquisition between the out side world and the instrument Based on the parameters available the administrator or user can activate value fields to Load IOP firmware or to Load ACP firmware or to Load both IOP and ACP firmware The IOP and ACP firmware are two different sets of firmware The IOP communicates directly with the InfoNode while the ACP is comprised of the host CPU and DSP If the value fields are activated new firmware is downloaded on demand from InfoNode to DataNode New firmware is downloaded automatically if the boot ROM finds that the existing firmware in the DataNode is missing or corrupt The administrator or user also has the option to Load Both IOP and ACP firmware to all DataNodes Download is accomplished using the standard Internet File Transfer Protocol FTP The DataNode must be connected to the network where the updates are to be extracted from to ensure a successful download Since these one time operations cannot be undone observe caution when performing download firmware procedures 10 45 10 46 5560 QOS 16 Accumulator Resets tab Properties Demand Resets Reset Real Power DMD total Never reset O Reset Reactive Power DMD total Never reset eset Apparent Power DMD total Never reset eset Peak Current Demand A Ne
49. change magnitude limit These limit values can be enabled and programmed Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide neutral and phase to phase setting To activate the wave form limit values click theWaveform change limit enabled box 10 29 10 30 5560 QOS Trending Tabs The following tabs are known as trending pages Metering Revenue Demand Adv Energy Adv Metering Unbalance Harmonics Flicker and Adv Harmonics These pages contain an enable disable checkbox at the top of the page The purpose of the checkbox on any trending page is to enable trending of properties and values listed on that page If the box 1s checked the settings on that page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Trending pages are available only for Custom EN50160 Compliance Setup Trending pages are hidden under Strict EN5160 Compliance Setup 5 Metering tab Properties Values Enable Trending This page Basic Metering Metering MMXUO M Selectthe journal entry entries to change Line Neutral Voltage A N Line Neutral Voltage B N Line Neutral Voltage C N Neutral Ground Voltage Line Line Voltage A B Line Line Voltage B C Line Line Voltage C A Line Current A Line Current B Line Current C Line Current N Active Power A Active Power B Active Power C Total Active Power Enable Periodic Sampling aC High High limit enabled High High limit
50. click to display Timeline View in a new browser window see page 4 3 DataNodes Range C From 10 29 2001 00 00 0 to 10 29 2001 16 20 47 Refresh this page to update the selection control contents and select default values click desired DataNode s to view Select the DataNode of interest Select date time range of interest Click on the Display or the Display in New Window button to initiate the query The results will appear either in this window or a new window depending on the button you click set time period of data to view Query Section screen 4 2 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 3 Timeline Once the DataNodes and time ranges have been selected you can select the Display or Display in New Window but ton to create a plot of one or two specified parameter s on the vertical axis and the time range on the horizontal axis This plot is the Timeline View which consists of two areas the Timeline Graph top and the Event List Detail bottom Click and drag the horizontal line that separates the two areas to enlarge either of them Timeline Graph The Timeline graph is auto scaled to use the maximum amount of space for viewing the data Key features of the timeline graph include 1 Graphs of the minimum average and maximum values of the parameter over a user selectable time interval are simultaneously displayed The default average value has a Views Page heavier line we
51. components of each phase Total Fundamental Vector VA Square root of fundamental frequency component of WATTS squared fundamental VARs squared Total Power Arithmetic sum of phase Watts Total Reactive Power Arithmetic sum of phase VARs Total Vector VA Square root of total WATTs squared total VARs squared Transformer A device used for changing the voltage of an AC circuit and or isolating a circuit from its power source Transient A subcycle disturbance in the AC waveform that is evi denced by a sharp brief discontinuity of the waveform May be of either polarity and may be additive to or sub tractive from the nominal waveform Trend A plot of an event characteristic versus time True PF Total Real Power divided by Total VA Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Appendix F True Phase Power or Real Power Measured in watts of each phase calculated over 1 sec ond from cycle by cycle power values voltage sample current sample Not valid for delta configurations Volt The quantitative measurement of electrical force or poten tial also called electromotive force Voltage The force of electricity in a circuit as expressed in volts It is the measure of work it takes to move a charge through a circuit Waveform The graphic form of an electrical power Waveshape Fault A cycle to cycle change in the voltage waveform charac teristic A waveshape fault may not be large enough or f
52. evaluation status is Incomplete under the following scenarios It is the current evaluation period and it has simply not completed It is a previous evaluation period but not enough data samples were included in the statistical analysis This may be due to the following reasons data was not collected or too many samples were tagged as unusable due to RMS variations or some other EN50160 criteria NOTE The criteria defining completeness of an evalua tion period is described on page 10 21 EN50160 General Setup tab Evaluation Period This column displays the date and time of the beginning of the evaluation period Each evaluation period is independent of each other Monitor This column displays the name of the DataNode to which the evaluation period belongs Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Compliance The EN50160 Answer Module determines compliance For completed periods Compliance displays PASS Green or FAIL Red For incomplete periods Compliance displays Undetermined Black A PASS or FAIL compliance status is hyperlinked to the Compliance Statistical Bar Chart featuring the 7 parameters required for determining compliance See sample bar chart on page 10 6 RMS Variation Event Count The RMS variation event count is a hyperlink to EN50160 DISDIP table for RMS variation events See page 10 15 for the EN50160 DIS DIP Table and 3D Bar Chart for RMS Variations Transient Event Count The Transient even
53. event A data point is plotted for each event and the graph is overlaid with equipment susceptible or safe operating type curves such as the ITIC curve or CBEMA Duration Histogram the duration of the varia tion versus the number of occurrences as a bar chart with a cumulative frequency of occurrence line graph overlaid Transients Magnitude Histogram the magnitude of the transient versus the number of occurrences as a bar chart with a cumulative frequency of occurrence line graph overlaid Duration Histogram the duration of the tran sient versus the number of occurrences as a bar chart with a cumulative frequency of occurrence line graph overlaid Frequency Histogram the principal frequency of the transient versus the number of occurrences as a bar chart with a cumulative frequency of occurrence line graph overlaid Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Quality of Supply The Quality of Supply Report is an analysis of the voltage similar to the requirements of the European Standard EN50160 which specifies that various parameters must be within a specified percentage for 95 of the time The user may select from an analysis of the Voltage Regulation Unbalance and Frequency The user may select the presentation of the data in trend and or histogram form The selections available are shown below Data to Plot iv Regulation M Frequency Plot Types iv Trend iv Histogram Quality Supply Spe
54. for all Views and Reports except the Timeline To Select the Time Range select one of eight pre format ted time range radio buttons or enter any valid starting and ending time date range Pre filtered Time Ranges and their definitions include All Time first event in memory to last event Last Hour previous hour from present time Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Views Page Today from 00 00 midnight of the present day until the present time Yesterday the 24 hour period ending at 00 00 midnight of present day Last 48 Hours previous 48 hours from present time This Week from 00 00 of Sunday of the present week until the present time Last 7 Days previous 7 days ending with 00 00 of today Last 14 Days previous 14 days ending with 00 00 of today Last 30 days previous 30 days ending with 00 00 of today This month from 00 00 of the first day of the month until present day This year from January 1 of the present year until the present day Last year from January 1 to December 31 of the previ ous year To Customize Time Date Ranges enter the starting and ending month day year as well as hour minute second in the format selected in the Setup page i e European date format 24 hour military time etc 4 Views Page Views Page Query section is used to select which specific DataNode The Views page offers three ways to display data you want to view as well as the Time Date Range w
55. http support microsoft com 7 16 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page 3 Battery The InfoNode system allows users to check on the Battery status whether charged or discharged and the remaining Battery capacity For convenience the system allows users to keep date time records when the Last discharge test was and when the Next discharge test will be 3 Time The InfoNode optionally provides for an on board GPS receiver capable of receiving time signals from the GPS system and utilizing those signals to continuously update the system clock If there is no GPS present or the GPS is present but a signal is not available then you can specify whether the Time Manager uses the internal clock or an Internet clock source To use the Internet clock source you should specify the IP address of the NTP Server Host A sample Time window screen appears as follows GPS installed GPS time valid Last update from NTP Specify the time source If a GPS is installed you should select that option If you select NTP Network Time Protocol Server your InfoNode must have permanent connection to the specified server If a GPS is neater and bs itis used as the time source and the selected time source is Altemate time source Internal clock eet NTP server host ef NTP server If you choose the intemal clock as the time source you can use the following fields to set the current date and time The clock is set when thes
56. hysteresis is used the threshold is altered by the specific amount equal to the hysteresis value after an initial disturbance is triggered until the signal crosses the altered threshold Impulse Instantaneous voltage deviation which may not affect rms voltage because of its short time duration Impulses can be caused by loads switching on line loose wires light ning static and power failures Impulses can cause data disruption and equipment malfunction and damage See transient Instantaneous or Crest Transient The largest magnitude value in a cycle KHz Kilohertz 1000 Hertz or cycles per second Line A current carrying conductor Line to Line A given condition between conductors of a multi phase feeder Line to Line values for wye circuits Vab Van Vbn Vbc Vbn Vcn Vca Ven Van Line to Neutral A given condition between a phase conductor and a neu tral conductor Load Any electrical device connected to a power source Low Low or Very Low Limit Set point or threshold below the low limit Low Limit Set point or threshold below the normal range MHz Megahertz One million Hertz or cycles per second Negative Sequence The three phase vectors that would make a motor rotate in the reverse direction Uj 1 3 Ua a Ub a Uc Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Appendix F where a is the 120 degree vector operator a is the 240 degree vector operator Net Current Vector
57. include Enabled RMS variation enabled check box Cycles per Sample cycles per measurement sample typically 1 Max Event Duration samples maximum event duration typ 512 Cycles to Trigger cycles to trigger typ 1 Cycles to End cycles to end typ 1 IMPULSES parameters include Enabled Impulses transients enabled check box Cycles Before cycles before typ 1 Cycles After cycles after typ 1 SNAPSHOTS parameters include Enabled Snapshot waveforms enabled check box Interval sec interval between recording in seconds typ 10860 TIMELINE parameters include Enabled Timeline steady state min max avg enabled check box Interval sec interval between recording in seconds typ 900 DEMAND REPORT parameters include Enabled Demand report power check box enabled Demand Interval min demand interval in minutes typ 15 Sliding Interval min sliding demand interval in min utes typ 15 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 4 Thresholds tab 5571 DataNode Setup Properties Values Waveform Changes Voltage Percent 10 0 Duration of cycle 10 RMS Events RMS Event Voltage A Swell Percent 110 0 Sag Percent 90 0 RMS Event Voltage B Swell Percent 110 0 Sag Percent 90 0 RMS Event Voltage C Swell Percent 110 0 Sag Percent 90 0 RMS Event Voltage N Swell Percent 10 0 Impu
58. is able to automatically determine phase rotation of the voltage channels and then match up the current channels The 5530 DataNode will swap voltage phases to ensure positive sequence phase rotation counter clockwise according to IEEE definitions and then swap and invert current channels to match The InfoNode is designed with a software user interface to enable users to do channel swapping and inversion information Channel mapping is used to correct for errors in wiring the instrument to the circuit If a mistake is made such as an inverted CT or a phase is connected to the wrong channel it can be corrected in the software instead of changing the wiring to the instrument Note that it is recommended that the actual wiring be changed but channel mapping can correct the problem if this is not practical Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup A channel mapping array is provided to permit manual configuration of channel swapping and inversion Under CHANNEL MAPPING click on the corresponding voltage or current phase to show which channel the Signal is connected to Click and enable the value field opposite Channel is inverted to as it applies The channel mapping array works by specifying a numeric code in each array slot that indicates which phase is connected to the physical 5530 DataNode channel Normally the channels and phases are matched as shown below Channels can be swapped and or inve
59. is coupled to customer e Capacitor and circuit system through transformer switching transients winding capacitances High frequency e Switching on e Radiated noise may disrupt transients secondary systems sensitive electronic equipment e Lightning induced e High rate of rise oscillations may ringing cause low voltage power supplies e Local ferroresonance to fail Voltage sags e Local and remote e Dropouts of sensitive customer faults equipment Voltage swells e Single line to ground e Equipment overvoltages faults e Failure of MOVs forced into conduction Long duration e Load switching e Problems with equipment that voltage variations e Capacitor switching require constant steady state e System voltage voltage regulation Harmonics e Nonlinear loads e Misoperation of sensitive equipment e Capacitor failures or fuse blowing e Telephone interference Voltage flicker e Arc fumaces and e Lighting flicker other intermittent e Misoperation of sensitive loads loads A 4 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Protocols Supported for InfoNode and DataNodes EPQ DataNodes Intemet Communication Protocols Ports HTTP port 80 nomal web requests replies file transfers XML fimware update time synchronization remote management FTP port 20 and 21 SNTP port 123 TELNET port 23 SMTP port 25 email protocol ISO TCP port 102 RFC 1006 ISO protocol over TCP IP for MMS protocol Appendix D server only client only client
60. is possible from anywhere in the world through the Intranet Internet or via a modem The InfoNode service uses the standard web browser Microsoft Internet Explorer V5 5 and higher or Netscape Navigator 6 x and higher running the Sun Java Virtual Machine 1 3 x or higher Sun Java VM 1 4 x is recommended Earlier versions of Netscape that use the Netscape Java VM are no longer supported Access time is dependent primarily on the communication media with a direct network connection being the fastest See Communicating with the InfoNode on PC on page 2 5 for more information Some of the most important optional add ons to the InfoNode on PC program are the Answer Modules software Answer Modules convert information into application specific answers using patented and proprietary expertise developed by Dranetz BMI Electrotek Concepts and Electric Power Research Institute EPRI These plug in application specific answers will cover applications from identifying power disturbance origins to reporting based on evolving standards to predicting maintenance schedules at substations Software optional accessories can be part of the initial purchase or easily added later For more information on optional accessories for the InfoNode on PC see Chapter 13 Optional Accessories and or contact Dranetz BMI Customer Service Department at 732 287 3680 or 1 800 372 6832 PC InfoNode User Interface The InfoNode on PC user interface consist
61. must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in Voltage RMS Variation and Transients limits For example if the Total Fundamental Frequency is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the Total Fundamental Frequency goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis then the event is recorded 8 16 5530 5520 DataNode Setup 9 Advanced Metering tab Properties Enable Trendina This paae Advanced Meterina Adv Meterina MADVO O Select the iournal entrv entries to chanae Total VA Arith Method Total VA Vect Method Total Fund VA Arth Method Total Fund VA Vect Method Worst True Power Factor Total Arithmetic True PF Total Vector True Power Factor Displacement Power Factor A Displacement Power Factor B Displacement Power Factor C Worst Displacement Power Factor Average Displacement PF Total Arithmetic Disp PF Total Vector Disp Power Factor Residual Curent Net Current Enable periodic samplina O Hiah Hiah limit enabled O Hiah Hiah limit 135 0 H
62. phase of a three phase system while letter N represents the neutral conductor The channels used to trigger threshold values are automatically set depending on the wiring configuration selected under the Basic tab High limit and Low limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for each phase to neutral and phase to phase setting To program individual limit values select the appropriate line that describes the phase neutral or phase to phase a 5530 5520 DataNode Setup 8 6 setting that you wish to change If the same limit value will be assigned to more than one phase press Shift click to select multiple phases Enter your limit value for the corresponding phase in the High limit and Low limit fields Click the Limit enabled box to activate Click the Save Setup button every time you assign different limit values PRE AND POST EVENT CAPTURES contain parameters that help users program the number of RMS and waveform cycles to be saved before pre and after post the start and the end of the event These parameters are Pre event start RMS samples Post event start RMS samples Pre event start waveform samples Post event start waveform samples Post event end RMS samples Pre event end waveform samples and Post event end waveform samples The parameters capture RMS sample or RMS waveform cycles that may be used to analyze and manage power event patterns and behavior With regard to the beginning and end of RMS v
63. security risk It is recommended that the computer be dedicated to being a PC InfoNode InfoNode on PC Installation and Setup IMPORTANT The following procedure will install the InfoNode on your PC for a trial period of 30 days The Signature System InfoNode Setup program copies the service onto your computer performs all the necessary service registration and creates Start Menu items for controlling the service The InfoNode will operate for a period of 30 days upon installation To continue to use the service beyond 30 days you must install a hardware lock called HASP on your computer The HASP can also be installed even before the 30 day trial period expires NOTE THAT YOU MUST INSTALL THE INFONODE SOFTWARE BEFORE YOU INSTALL THE HASP See page 2 10 for information on how to install the PC InfoNode with HASP Getting Started To install InfoNode on PC insert the CD ROM with the InfoNode program on the disc drive and do the following a Click on the Install InfoNode link provided in the program disc OR Browse the contents of the disc to locate the Install folder then select the Setup exe file b Double click the Setup exe file c Follow the instructions on screen and or in the next pages to continue installing InfoNode 5 x Eile Edit View Favorites Tools Help EJ Back v gt 8 Bsearch Folders lt 4 23 83 x x d Address DAInstall Go Links 3 Size Type Modified 507 KB Winzip Fi
64. sequence impedance of the primary feeder real 0 0570 Positive sequence impedance of the primary feeder imaginary 0 1225 Zero sequence impedance of the primary feeder real 0 1790 Zero sequence impedance of the primary feeder imaginary 0 4150 Setup screen for Radial Fault Location Activate Answer Module Check the box to activate or clear the box to deactivate Ground fault pickup current threshold amperes The value of the current that needs to be exceeded before it is considered a ground fault Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page Phase fault pickup current threshold amperes The value of the current that needs to be exceeded before it is considered a phase fault Ratio of fault peak current to pre fault peak current A threshold to compare RMS values before and during a fault Sequence impedance unit Units used for impedance and feeder length Length of primary feeder This information is optional If it is available it should be supplied If it is not available enter feeder length 0 Positive sequence impedance of the primary feeder real The real part of the complex number positive sequence impedance Positive sequence impedance of the primary feeder imaginary The imaginary part of the complex number positive sequence impedance Zero sequence impedance of the primary feeder real The real part of the complex number zero sequence impedance Zero sequence impedance of the primar
65. the DataNode of interest Help Report Topics Select date time range of interest Index v oe E Click on the Display or the Display in New Window button to initiate the query The results will appear either in this window or a new m Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz BlMl and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Quality of Supply Query Screen E Quality Of Supply Report Microsoft Internet Explorer Edison SE 5560 DRANETZ 11 15 2002 00 00 00 to Quality Of Supply Report 11 15 2002 17 18 58 admin Table of Contents 1 Regulation Trend Phase A 2 Regulation Trend Phase B 3 Regulation Trend Phase C 4 Regulation Trend Phase N 5 Erequency Trend Phase A TOC TOC12345 gt gt Next gt gt Quality of Supply Table of Contents 10 19 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 10 20 5560 QOS Real time Display of QOS Data Among the new parameters included in the 5560 DataNode in addition to those available in DataNode 5530 5520 are those required to meet the specification of a flicker meter as per EN61000 4 15 Thus under Real time page new channels are defined to support real time display of flicker measurements Flicker is the effect on the visual human perception by a changing emission of light by lamps subjected to fluctuations of their supply voltage Voltage fluctuations consist o
66. the power quality diagnostic capabilities expected from Dranetz BMI Scope of EN50160 Standard It is important to note that EN50160 is defined for the electricity supplied at the supply terminals and does not deal with the supply system or the consumer s installation or equipment itself As the standard deals with the voltage characteristics in public distribution networks other aspects essential for the supply quality for instance short circuit power are not treated in this standard The standard is applicable only under normal operating conditions of the supply system This includes also the correct operation of protection devices in the case of a fault in the network blowing of a fuse operation of a circuit breaker etc the operation of loads agreed between customer and supplier and changes in the network The standard lists several specific examples of exceptional conditions out of supplier s control that can cause one or more of the characteristics to go beyond the values given These conditions include exceptional weather conditions and other natural disasters third party interference acts by public authorities industrial action force majeure and power shortages resulting from external events Under such conditions the EN50160 does not apply EN50160 is not an EMC standard It does not give com patibility levels or emission limits Moreover the standard does not have the function of specifying the requirements f
67. the reduced sampling rate parameters can be set for that item Data for the sample rates only apply to RMS not waveform variations The reason behind storing sampling rates is that the memory capacity of the monitoring instrument makes it impractical to record an entire long duration sag or swell point by point The waveforms before and after the trigger are digitized to help identify the cause of the excursion but only RMS values are stored over the full duration event that is longer than the pre and post trigger setting If the event has not ended after a programmed time period the instrument switches to averaging cycles of RMS data to further conserve memory yet accurately represent the event At this point the RMS plot diverges from a single valued line to a band of minimum maximum and average values During extremely long events the instrument switches to successively longer averaging periods explained next The sample rates represent three supplemental recording interval or chart speeds defined for recording long events When recording at reduced rates three values are saved for each data point the minimum maximum and average value of the previous interval The Sample min max avg every N cycles refers to the number of cycles to average for the selected reduced sampling rate While Number of seconds to use this rate refer to the number of seconds to record at the selected reduced sampling rate The following default sequen
68. the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect The following parameter values can be enabled under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE individual phase and three phase total real power demand reactive demand apparent power demand average PF and peak real power values Highlight the parameter value you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son that is higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place For example if Real Power Demand is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the Real Power Dema
69. time settings refer to the online documentation Installing Tardis 2000 Time Service on the CD ROM 2 9 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Preparation for Use PC InfoNode with HASP The InfoNode service will operate only for a period of 30 days from the date of installation To continue to use InfoNode on PC beyond 30 days you must install a HASP on your computer The HASP can be installed even before the 30 day trial period for PC InfoNode ends WARNING DO NOT insert the HASP before installing the InfoNode program Otherwise MS Windows will fail to find the proper driver for the HASP but may still add a non working HASP driver to the Device Manager Control Panel System In this case the HASP driver needs to be manually removed from the Device Manager Control Panel System When done restart the computer and reinstall PC InfoNode from the CD ROM InfoNode on PC To install the InfoNode program from the CD ROM follow the instructions on InfoNode on PC Installation and Setup on pages 2 1 to 2 5 HASP The InfoNode HASP see figure below can be keyed to the USB port Align the HASP to the keyed port and push gently to lock it in place Keep the HASP in the port while using the InfoNode program NOTE Make sure to write down the serial number of your HASP and keep this information in a secure place The serial number is required to replace HASP in case it gets lost or destroyed HAS P ID LABEL For pricing
70. to access the same Help information The differences lay only in the way each button organizes and lists information The gt gt button brings the user forward to the next linked page The lt lt button brings the user backward to the previously linked page 3 Index The Index page operates exactly like the Index portion of a book Information is listed and categorized in alphabeti cal order Click any button from A to Z to show various related topics under each letter The topics are featured as hyperlinks The Contents button operates exactly like the Table of Contents in books Information is listed and organized under different headings The headings normally used here are the tab names Sub topics per heading appear as hyperlinks Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page This chapter explains the various programmable settings 1 InfoNode for the InfoNode For security reasons the settings can be e InfoNode Setup can be expanded to reveal the following changed only by persons with admin access privileges data folders Users Notifications Communications Answer Module DataNodes and Help Desk Setup Page The Setup page is used to view and or change any of the E Users programmable features of both InfoNodes and DataNodes The InfoNode Setup page is generic without regard to which types of DataNodes are connected to the system The DataNode Setup pages are specific to the type of DataNode T
71. tte e de 5 2 Energy and Demand cote rnees i rer i er tees 5 2 Event urmmalty 5 oet IEEE KEEPER TUER UNO PIE ERE E ERE RETURN TEES 5 2 Top SNSc M 5 2 Standard Repotts 5 ise trier er ERR Ue p EEES EIE EH IP a des 5 4 Event Sutitiafles io auto PREISE URSUS EGT SEHEUTIRI EE EEES 5 4 TOD TO EVE MSk ess otro et ner IPIE 5 4 Event Statistics sicaire eine Ont olathe elie ico cM ERROR 5 4 RMS Vat atlOm Sesec sodas cecstecscbeceatensancossosttcnsntssousstouhageet stean pee EE RP ENERE 5 4 UE Rm 5 4 Quality of Supply inse eite eot erected lacs hwnanbactin ev dab vede idet os 5 5 Waveform Distortion nnne nnn nnns 5 5 Energy and Demand isre oc iiit eeu tige eee RS 5 5 InfoNode Summary coa pa ree cn re e AE bb editis 5 5 Answer Module eistel Hale eo p CHEER ei eei tee 5 6 RMS Variation Indices e o EE ELLE EE ERES ES ERAI AEN tin EES 5 6 AgPregated Energy EXPENSE iioi peres eiren srann Onis taeun te Pse edis 5 8 Eneroy q lm 5 10 Energy Usage Comparison Report 5 12 UPS Verifications iu oou bias EORR eee 5 14 Fault oC ath OU oic opea EEUU Oe Er HUI ede in eb nins 5 17 RBM Reliability Benchmarking Methodology ss 5 17 RBM Aggregated RMS Event List eeseeseeeeeeeeeeneene eene 5 18 le M 5 18 Report Topics cs uiii inis ties cendi hon ca ined i denen 5 18 jh d 5 18 6 Real time Page Real tiie Pages uses ete ndu
72. used here are the tab names Sub topics per heading appear as hyperlinks Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Real time Page This chapter describes how the system enables users to view DataNode information in real time mode Through the different display options available the users are able to view and capture DataNode information as it happens and when it happens on site Real time Page The Real time page allows you to display the parameters being monitored by the DataNodes in a continually updated manner The definition of real time is dependent on the DataNode itself as well as the communication propagation delays Typically the various parameter values are updated every couple of seconds The data can be displayed in a variety of formats including a tabular meter panel The Real time menu page appears as follows ww Signature System InfoNode Reports Real time Setup al time Welcome to the Real time home page D meter Dials The Real time home page allows you to display the parameters being monitored by the DataNodes in a continually updated manner D Meter Panel The definition of real time is dependent on the DataNode itself as well as the communication propagation delays Typically the values of the various parameters are updated every couple of seconds The data can be displayed in a variety of formats including a tabular meter panel Real time home page 73 Views 3 Meter Dials The Meter
73. values For example the IH3 is the interharmonic values between 2nd and 3rd harmonic A sample plot is shown below Compliance Summary Report Microsoft Internet Explorer i D x Edison SE 5560 11 11 2002 10 00 00 to 11 15 2002 15 50 00 admin Compliance Summary Report Interharmonics Graph Edison SE 5560 Compliance Statistics Summary Graph 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 380 90 100 H 10 16 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS 6 Power Frequency Graph The Power Frequency parameter has two ranges considered for compliance This graph displays the status of parameter with respect to each range The bar chart indicates the percentage of the intervals passing the specified compliance A sample plot is shown below Compliance Summary Report Microsoft Internet Explorer of x Edison SE 5560 11 11 2002 10 00 00 to Compliance Summary Report 11 15 2002 15 50 00 admin EE ORANETZ Power Frequency Graph Edison SE 5580 Compliance Statistics Summary Graph 30 40 50 605 70 30 90 1005 10 17 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS 7 Min Max Tables The Min Max table displays the minimum maximum and average values for Power Frequency and RMS Voltage along with time and date of occurrence Maximum phase values of Rapid Voltage Change Flicker Supply Voltage Unbalance and Harmonics a
74. with up to 80 characters can be specified The Data Recording Type property specifies how the data is to be stored Data storage options are either Interval or Accumulator For Interval data the value of the counter at the beginning of the sampling interval is subtracted from the value of the counter at the end of the interval For Accumulator data accumulated value of the counter is stored The Quantity Measured Characteristic and Units properties are used to define the channel type in the InfoNode data base Selection from these characteristics allows the InfoNode to group the channel with appropriate channels during selection and allow some reports to include the signals measured in more meaningful ways Sample input values are Voltage for Quantity Measured Instantaneous Sampled for Characteristic and Volts for Units The Channel Scale property specifies the number used to scale the value read from the ADAM unit to the value you wish to record This depends on the transducers that are measuring the real signal For instance a flow sensor might out put 5 counts per liter If the unit of measure is in liters the scale would be 1 5 or 0 20 The Channel Offset property allows an offset to be applied to the signal measured from ADAM module This must be specified in scaled units If a pressure transducer were to output 0 volts at 1000 mbar and you desire a reading of 1000 mbar specify 1000 for the offset assuming the appropriate scale was
75. 0 msec Short Duration Variations Sag Vots m w l AM ANANA LAAN Ii ii MA TH i li NAM AMAA u TETTE nu sod ul NAN I AAA UUUUUUVUVUUVUVVUUVUVUUUVUVVV UU qm 10012245 1001 2250 1001 2255 10012260 10012265 10912270 CHA Yos CHB Vots CHC Vots LI 09 11 04 10 01 22 Threshold crossed 456 0 V CATEGORY Short Duration Instantaneous Sag Instantaneous Momentary Temporary 30 cycles 3 seconds 3 sec 1 min Duration 0 433 sec B c D AB Vrmsmax 270 2 274 6 270 9 4 852 468 9 469 7 469 2 Vrmsavg 256 7 25718 251 6 4 613 4454 A460 A461 ecd Ph mh ma im Inmsavg 8754 9028 8794 0 003 Edison 56307 450 Base 120 0 Vims Long Duration Duration gt 1 minute 1 1 100 Variations 5 Undervoltage a Dur 741 46 msec Mag 0 25 V Overvoltage d a 02 04 06 08 1 Time ed Rms Voltage Minimum A RmsVoltage A Upper Threshold _ Rms Voltage A Lower Threshold Tigger Rms Voltage Maximum A ama Fins Voltage Average A 12 19 2004 08 40 18 71 Momentary Interruption Dranetz SMI Bectrotek Concepts Interruptions Momentary Temporary Outage HOS 5520 Base 277 0 Vims 3007 2207 gt 2507 240 Dur 3335 msee zu Mag 208 58 V 207 1 1 1 i 6 505 04 045 02 Timsised Rms Voltage Minimum A Rms Voltage A Upper Threshold Rims Voltage A Lo
76. 02 10 21 19 24 5 2002 10 18 07 55 00 ctual dollars en 1 J Iz e Iz o N io oj Sample Energy Expense Report Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page Energy Usage Comparison Report The Energy Usage Comparison Report features a query setup to enable users to generate a comparative energy usage report for each DataNode Data is only available when the Energy Usage Answer Module is installed gt maez Signature System InfoNode Home Reports Real time up ort 5 Energy Usage Comparison Report aman Napota A Display Display in New Window DataNodes H8 5540 H08 5571 v Range Today z C From 2002 11 19 00 00 00 to 2002 11 19 16 52 06 Increment Weekly x Start of Comparison Period 2002 10 19 00 00 00 Refresh this page to update the selection control contents and select default values Select the DataNode of interest erModule ration Indices Select date time range of interest Click on the Display or the Display in New Window button to initiate the query The results will appear either in this window or a new window depending on the button you click Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz Blvll and Blectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Setup screen for Energy Usage Comparison Report Select the DataNode with which you want to generate a comparative usage report As with the other reports specify the date and time range of interest
77. 10 E 15 30 B0 Interruption 99 100 Temporary Overvoltage 110 120 120 140 140 60 160 200 200 iDepth 96 of nominal or declared voltage EN50160 DISDIP Table for Transient Events Transient Overvoltage Counts 110 120 n 120 140 0 140 160 o 160 200 28 200 n Table for Transient Overvoltages EN50160 3D Graph for RMS Variations 10 15 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS 4 Harmonics Graph The Harmonics Graph displays the status of each of the individual harmonics and THD for each phase The bar chart indicates the percentage of the intervals passing the specified compliance Odd harmonic numbers are marked on vertical axis Even harmonic numbers are located in between A sample harmonics plot is shown below a Compliance Summary Report Microsoft Internet Explorer Edison SE 5560 n a DRANETZ Compliance Summary Report pirated pest 00 Lid m 2 admin Harmonics Graph Edison SE 5580 Compliance Statistics Summary Graph 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 380 90 100 5 Interharmonics Graph The Interharmonics Graph displays the status of each of the individual interharmonics and TID for each phase The bar chart indicates the percentage of the intervals passing the specified compliance Interharmonic numbers are actually groups of 5Hz frequency bars between the adjacent harmonic
78. 2 59 35 CDRWest Mag 32011 26 Duration 0 17 secs SLG stPhase B 26 01 in 1000 ft 27 14 in 1000 fb 08 12 2000 14 51 37 CDRWest Mag 34002 29V Duration 0 17 secs SLG atPhase C 20 12 in 1000 amp 21 10 in 1000 amp 08 18 2000 18 19 39 CDRWest Magm 34001 41V Duration 0 17 secs SLG atPhase C 27 51 in 1000 8 28 68 in 1000 8 Sample Radial Fault Report RBM Reliability Benchmarking Methodology The RBM Answer Module adds two reports The first is the RBM RMS Variation Indices see page 5 6 for description and the second is the RBM Aggregated RMS Event List described next Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5 17 5 18 Reports Page 3 RBM Aggregated RMS Event List This report is a table of RBM Aggregated Events for the specified DataNode and time range The RBM Aggregation Parameters define how the events are aggregated For more information on the RBM Aggregation Parameters refer to page 7 26 of Chapter 7 Setup Page The query setup for this report is the standard report query information and requires no additional parameters to be selected More parameters such as type of aggregation and method are set up in the Setup tab A sample report is shown below 00 ORANETZ BMI Aggregated Event Start Time Phase Aggregated Magnitude Aggregated Duration 09 01 2001 13 16 00 B 178 64 3796 09 02 2001 18 46 56 A 247 89 2396 09 04 2001 09 49 50 c 235 84 8
79. 30 5520 DataNode Setup Summary of EPQ DataNode Setup Parameters and Tabs where they can be Found PARAMETERS Pst Plt Plt Sliding Q Dmd Peak P Dmd Q Dmd Peak VA Dmd Reactive Power Demand Reactive Power Demand Residual Current Rms Current Rms Current Demand Rms Current Individual Harmonics Rms Harmonic Current Rms Voltage Rms Voltage Individual Harmonics Rys Fund Freq varHrs Rys Fund Freq WHrs Total Fund Freq Q Transformer K Factor True Power Factor IV Imbalance rms rms avg V Imbalance S0 S1 IV Imbalance S2 S1 IV RMS Harmonic IV I Angle IV A Dmd Peak Q Dmd VA Dmd Peak P Dmd Var Hours Vector Sum DF Vector Sum PF Vector Sum VA IV oltage Crest Factor Voltage THD Voltage THD Rms Voltage TID Voltage TID Rms Voltage TIF Voltage TIF Rms Watt Hours Zero Sequence Current Zero Sequence Voltage Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide TAB WHERE FOUND DVANCED METER RMS Variation TRANSIENTS METER DEMAND DVANCED HARMONICS HARMONICS RMS Variation TRANSIENTS METER DVANCED HARMONICS DVANCED ENERGY DVANCED ENERGY DVANCED ENERGY HARMONICS METER ADVANCED METER DVANCED METER DVANCED METER DVANCED METER HARMONICS HARMONICS HARMONICS HARMONICS HARMONICS 8 29 5530 5520 DataNode Setup This page intentionally left blank 8 30 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5540 Energy Management EM DataNode Setup Refer to the 5540
80. 42 Refresh this page to update the selection control contents and selegt default values Select the DataNodes of interest Hold down the Control key to seldct multiple DataNodes By default All DataNodes are selected Select date time range of interest Click on the Display or the Display in New Window button to initiate the query The results will appear either in this window or a new window depending on the button you click Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz BlMl and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Smart Trends Query Screen Smart Trends 11 15 2002 00 00 00 to 11 15 2002 14 27 43 Edison 5540 Edison 5571 Edison SE 5560 Edison SE 5530 selected DataNode See page Zero Sequence Current kk 10 10 Screen capture shows TT only a partial list of parameters Rms Voltage dw Y Y Y Rms Current v w v Active Power w 94 E 4 Reactive Power v 93 x x Apparent Power v 9 X 4 True Power Factor d x X Frequency S v Y Active Power Demand v i v E x Reactive Power Demand A x v X Apparent Power Demand y w Y x Voltage THD r v Y VUnbalance S281 AC 2 X Positive Sequence Voltage AE x v s Hegative Sequence Voltage S x w Click the green check mark to a Gum 5 Y Positive Sequence Current AE X x Pd trend the parameter for the negative Sequence Curent E E 4 91 x x v I Y ong Term er X Trend Paramet
81. 496 Query and Aggregation Parameters Monitor Days in query 5 actual range 5 Characterization Level Temporal Aggregation Worst Case Method Min V Aggregation Time 60 RBM Aggregated Event Report H09 5530 09 01 2001 00 00 00 to 09 05 2001 11 26 44 admin 0 025 Sec 1 5 Cycle s 0 017 Sec 1 0 Cycle s 0 008 Sec 0 5 Cycle s Sample RBM Aggregated Event Report 71 Help Much of what is written in this manual can be found in the Help option onscreen Expanding the Help tree will provide Reports Topics and Index links 3 Report Topics The Report Topics page simply says that the user is cur rently in the Reports page Four active buttons are found in this page Contents Index lt lt and gt gt These buttons present different ways to access the same Help informa tion The differences lay only in the way each button organizes and lists information The button brings the user forward to the next linked page The button brings the user backward to the previously linked page 3 Index The Index page operates exactly like the Index portion of a book Information is listed and categorized in alphabet ical order Click any button from A to Z to show various related topics under each letter The topics are featured as hyperlinks The Contents button operates exactly like the Table of Contents in books Information is listed and organized under different headings The headings normally
82. 5 Minimum 0 780 a t 50 E 153 a o 740 g 05 EH 20 01 D 1 D y D 1 1 1 lj D 1 1 1 1 1 1 ro o Yd D r O AN YM Y OR o m mM 3 oV ovS og UN NH RH Qd QA au ANN GA GS o o o occoc c oO Go o oocoocoooo Long Term Flicker A Long Term Flicker A Cumulative Probability Choose a channel or group of channels from the left and use the right arrow button to select Dranetz B l Bectrotek Concepts Timeline Graph with data trend for Long Term Flicker To remove a channel from the selected list selectthe channel and use the left arrow to remove the channel DK Apply Cancel P Smart Trends Microsoft Internet Explorer ioj xl Smart Trends 11 15 2002 00 00 00 to 11 15 2002 14 16 09 Edison SE 5560 0 357 0 37 gt 0257 Ew 0 27 0 157 E 1 1 11 15 2002 i 1 20 00 11 16 2002 00 00 00 00 D0 00 00 00 Short Term Flicker B Long Term Flicker A Dranetz BMl Bectrotek Concepts Edison SE 5560 Long Tarmiklickar Vott ga A 11 15 2002 00 00 00 00 11 15 2002 14 16 09 00 T100 Samples 14 Minimum 0 80 Average 0 2 60 20 0 Cumulative Probability A Ei z E T 1 o a N A 05 DR o oc Long Term Flicker A Long Term Flicker A Cumulative Probability Dranetz BMl Bectrotek Concepts zl Timeline Graph with additional data trend for Short Term Flicker 10 10 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s
83. 7 5 rmz Signature System InfoNode R Craigs Pager Ken Ken O Ken amp i gt DP Recipients RMS Disturbances Transient Disturbances Threshold Crossings Ki Save Setup Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement DataNode Recipients notification setup The Enable RMS Notification must be checked to allow the system to send RMS disturbance event notifications to recip ients Threshold properties for the different RMS Disturbance Categories have been set under the Basic Characterizer RMS Disturbance Categories tab see page 7 19 The Enable Category allows users to select which category they want to activate and as per the RMS disturbance category definition on page 7 18 register as RMS event This selective enabling process allows users more control over the event notifications they receive ESEw Signature System InfoNode iv RMS Disturbance Categories Category 4 Category 5 Category 6 Cateao gt Df Recipients RMS Disturbances Transient Disturbances Threshold Crossings Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc Al rights reserved User Agreement DataNode RMS Disturbances event notification setup Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 10 Setup Page The Enable Transient Notification must be checked to allow the system to
84. A 5 Appendix Signature System Network Capabilities The Signature System uses industry standard TCP IP network communication The Signature System is con figurable to work with most popular network addressing schemes including Classes A B and C Most com pany local area networks or LANs utilize the Class C addressing scheme Class C is also well suited for small stand alone networks For these reasons the factory default and the shipped network settings of the Signature System makes use of the Class C addressing scheme For proper operation the addressing scheme of the Signature System devices must match the addressing scheme of the network to which they are connected For example you cannot mix Class C and Class B hosts on the same physical network Description of Networking Classes IP Addressing An IP address is a 32 bit number usually represented in a dotted decimal notation i e 146 34 47 24 which uniquely identifies every host connected to an internet network Each field between the periods is an 8 bit number called an octet with values between 0 and 255 The numbers 0 127 and 255 however have special meanings when they appear For an unknown address Zeros are used i e when a machine is requesting that a server assign to it an IP address When a machine refers to its own address 127 is used The terminology for this is loopback To broadcast a packet to every host on a local network the value 255 is used
85. ADAM 5051 4 Channel Isolated Digital Input ADAM 5052 4 Channel Counter Frequency Module up down counter mode only ADAM 5080 RS 232 to RS 485 Converter ADAM 4522 solated RS 232 to RS 485 Converter ADAM 4520 12VDC 820ma power supply ADAMPWR Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Optional Accessories 13 Optional Accessories This page intentionally left blank 13 2 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Appendix Quantities Calculated from Periodic Voltage and Current Measurements Samples per cycle scs at it sample Current at i sample Real Power rms voltage or Total Harmonic X PRO Id Distortion THD X urrent at harmo hax Highest resolved harmonic Telephone Influence Factor W Harmonic weighting factor from table IT Product Crest Factor E T i sample in one cycle Note that CF for sinusoidal wave is 1 414 not 1 0 X Voltage or current at Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide A 2 Appendix Summary of Power Quality Variations Transients Oscillatory Transient Impulsive Transient H09 5530 6007 400 YN 2007 gt 0 k x CEN cgi e auf LZ Base 391 7 Vpk pK N Dur 2 08 msec Mag 406 05 V i 1 1 0 015 0 02 0 025 0 03 0 035 0 04 0 045 TimeGec Decaying Oscillation Low frequency lt 5 kHz Med frequency 5 500 kHz High frequency gt 500 kHz Unidirectional Typical duration 20
86. AS 8 Code Activated Switch sss 7 14 MIMS iodastciretetuneiede GAMA aA tuit den iet te OR ERE os 7 15 hzc Pr 7 16 bur 7 17 u 7 17 Regional Settiigso reete or RU RU RIEF PER 7 17 Answer Module 0 n noli e UE ERE ERR EH EUR E i 7 18 Basic Character Zen cis secte re nc t ee ird ee AREE EOS 7 18 RMS Disturbance Categories 7 19 Transient Disturbance Cate gories cecscceesseeeserceecereeeeeceesseeeeeaetereneeees 7 20 ENS0160 1 tiisecettertiiteitteta eera Eee ERE EE ie usse ex CEPI ea EEEE 7 20 I Sy USAC EC 7 21 lai edil ce 7 21 DataNodes isiatuennti ai oH UR HG GR HEURE RETE PE UA 7 22 Rate Sie UTE eontra lee EUR Wesen 7 23 Kvar Change Observer sese 7 24 Radial Fault Location seere oroin br n e E e PEORES 7 24 RBM Reliability Benchmarking Methodology sess 7 26 Aggregation Parameters intioiacteii da eco 7 26 UPS VetifiCAtlOni citron t e ede tte FEET Ee REP iu enero Pince 7 27 DataNodes sie iiie ai REIHE Ce EE E ei AS 7 28 General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes through the IntolNode Semp PASS sree eerie ob OPE DEO UT e e eir tentes det eitis 7 29 xiv Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Contents 8 5530 5520 DataNode Setup DataNode Programmable Tabs sese 8 1 W
87. Accumulator Resets tab features checkboxes to enable disable Demand Resets and Energy Accumulators To illustrate DataNode program settings in detail this Chapter makes use of a hypothetical DataNodel under the 5530 5520 DataNode Setup This Chapter provides a detailed discussion of the functionalities in each tab Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear The Signature System InfoNode DataNode is designed to provide programming support as well as data display The InfoNode Setup page is where the parameters and value settings are programmed The programmed parameters and value settings are translated and displayed in meaningful data format under the Views page Real time page and Reports page Refer to the previous chapters for more details on the Views Real time and Reports pages 8 1 8 2 5530 5520 DataNode Setup Programming the Tabs LEGEND Please note the following conventions are used in the screen displays Items in italics are not programmable but included for information purpose to the user Items in bold are examples of what can be entered Selections available in drop down menu are enclosed in brackets xxxx Caution Dranetz BMI has already set default values for the various parameters in each DataNode The default values have been tested to result in optimal system performance Users are advised not to change the default value settings unless there are applications which require advanced setups 1 G
88. C Output 3 square root of Pinst A Output 3 square root of Pinst B Output 3 square root of Pinst C LPF of Output 3 A LPF of Output 3 B LPF of Output 3 C Enable periodic sampling High High limit enabled High High limit High limit enabled High limit 0 00 Low limit enabled Li Low threshold 0 00 Low Low limit Deadband enabled Deadband The Flicker page is an extended trending setup page unique to the 5560 DataNode There are three flicker val ues available for trending the Short term flicker or Pst the long term flicker or Plt and Plt calculated on a sliding window Flicker is measured as per IEC 1000 4 15 Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a checkbox in the value field opposite Flicker which enables the trending of values listed in this page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Under SAMPLE INTERVALS are two numeric edit controls the Pst Interval and the Plt Interval Pst Interval is used to set the Pst calculation interval The default value is 10 minutes Plt interval is used to set the Plt calculation interval The default value is 120 minutes Under SELECT JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE various flicker parameters can be trended using periodic readings that are stored in a journal 10 41 10 42 5560 QOS Highlight the valu
89. DataNode group that has no plus or minus sign displayed means that the folder is empty To add a DataNode site select the appropriate DataNode group and Setup Page click on the right mouse button The Add DataNode button will appear click on it A new DataNode name will appear in the tree directory Click on the new name to display the DataNode parameter screen on the right window pane Use this screen to modify the DataNode parameters 5 The InfoNode Setup page provides a wide variety of user configured features represented as tabs located across the bottom of the Setup page Click on a specific DataNode site to display the various parameters on the right hand pane Consider this screen area as your work space The parameters change depending on which tab is selected 6 Use the arrow keys to navigate through the different tabs 1 automatically selects the first or leftmost tab lt selects one tab left of another gt selects one tab right of another I automatically selects the end or rightmost tab 7 DataNode setup display screens appear in two column format the Properties column and the Values column The Properties column lists the names of available parameters in each tab The Values column contains either textual notations numeric values or check boxes pertaining to the parameters described Use the scroll bars to view and access the different properties and values available on screen Below is a sample Da
90. Description Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz Blll and Bectrotek Concepts Inc AI rights reserved User Agreement InfoNode Home page click any DataNode hyperlink to view specific DataNode information Signature System InfoNode Real time Setup DataNode 141 gt E introduction LI E Index Last connection 10 25 2001 16 45 11 System health is normal 5530 5520 DataNode Serial number 00 01 32 00 00 08 Version V1 1 238010312 E2 5 18010928 V1 0 211000922 V2 5 16011015 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Quality of Supply QOS Compliance NOTE Information on QOS Compliance only appears when the 5560 DataNode support package SW IAP60 is installed The Home page reports Quality of Supply compliance status for the latest complete evaluation period of each DataNode Information about QOS compliance appears in two parts of the Home page the DataNode status paragraph and the DataNode status table Compliance Message on DataNode Status Paragraph An additional message on QOS compliance is appended to the DataNode Status Sample messages include 3 DataNodes are reporting Quality of Supply non compliance or One DataNode is having problems 2 DataNodes are inactive Like other DataNode messages in the status paragraph the compliance message is hyperlinked to the Quality of Supply Compliance section in the DataNode status table Compliance Message on DataNode Status Table An addi
91. ER OFF Fund Vector Sum VA ADV METER OFF Vector Sum DF ADV METER OFF Vector Sum PF ADV METER OFF Vector Sum VA ADV METER OFF Residual Current ADV METER OFF Net Current ADV METER OFF Active Power Demand DEMAND ON is TOTAL only Apparent Power Demand DEMAND ON is TOTAL only Avg PF Peak P Dmd DEMAND OFF Avg PF Peak Q Dmd DEMAND OFF P Dmd Peak Q Dmd DEMAND OFF P Dmd Peak S Dmd DEMAND OFF Peak Active Power Demand DEMAND OFF Peak Apparent Power Demand DEMAND OFF Peak Demand Current DEMAND OFF Peak Reactive Power Demand DEMAND OFF PF Peak VA Dmd DEMAND OFF PF Demand DEMAND OFF Predicted P Dmd DEMAND OFF Predicted Q Dmd DEMAND OFF Predicted VA Dmd DEMAND OFF Q Dmd Peak P Dmd DEMAND OFF Q Dmd Peak VA Dmd DEMAND OFF Reactive Power Demand DEMAND ON is TOTAL only Rms Current Demand DEMAND OFF VA Dmd Peak P Dmd DEMAND OFF VA Dmd Q Peak Q Dmd DEMAND OFF ANSI Transformer Derating Factor HARMONICS OFF Current Crest Factor HARMONICS OFF Current THD HARMONICS OFF Current THD Rms HARMONICS ON A B C TOT no limits Current TID HARMONICS OFF 10 48 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS EN 50160 Compliance Default Trending Setup munem RE mme imei PARAMETERS FOUND STATUS amp COMMENTS Current TID Rms HARMONICS Harmonic Power HARMONICS OFF IEEE 519 Current TDD HARMONICS Interharmonic Rms Current HARMONICS a thru 24 25 Va Vb Vc Limits HARMONICS HARMONICS em THD HARMONICS
92. Energy and Demand Specific Query Setup 3 InfoNode Summary The InfoNode Summary table is a listing of the oldest to newest administrative activity recorded by the InfoNode The table includes the following data Entry Time the time that the logged activity occurred Entry a name for the activity such as User login or DataNode added User identifies who carried out the activity Source Name the part of the system affected by the activity that could be the name of a user or a DataNode Description provides additional information about the entry For example if the Entry is DataNode communi cation OK then the Description could be System health is normal 5 5 5 6 Reports Page L Answer Module Some answer modules provide information via a separate report Other answer modules may just add characteristics to the events that are displayed in the event summary table such as direction of disturbance Answer Modules that create a separate report will be covered in this section 3 RMS Variation Indices The query information required for the RMS Variation Indices is very similar to all other reports First select the DataNode of interest and then select the time range The query setup for this report requires that two additional parame ters be set The query setup specific to this report is shown below RMS Variation Index Report Setup Monitoring Days Method Estimated Index Normalization Setup 30 Da
93. Guide 5560 QOS QOS Compliance Reports Smart Reports QOS Compliance allows the user to look at all EN50160 compliance information for all 5560 DataNodes Click on QOS Compliance to display the standard query selection shown below Users have the option to view compliance reports for single or multiple DataNode s Users can also select the time range or specify a time period to view data from Only data for 5560 DataNodes will be displayed in the result set once the Display or Display in New Window button is clicked Once selections have been made click on either Display or Display in New Window The QOS Compliance table shown next page is displayed E Signature System InfoNode Home Ri 1 Real time Setup Compliance Smart Report Display Display in New Window DataNodes Edison 5571 Range s week bd C From f 1 15 2002 00 00 00 to f 1 15 2002 15 27 18 I Specify Report Headings Any range selected that is less than the current QOS interval length will display the current QOS interval Refresh this page to update the selection control contents and select default values Select the DataNodes of interest Hold down the Control key to select multiple DataNodes By default All DataNodes are selected Select date time range of interest Click on the Display or the Display in New Window button to initiate the query The results will appear either in this window or a new window depending on the button you click
94. Hours Never reset 0 0 00 0 0 0O o0 Bw 0 mi miu mi o In connection with electric utility billing practices the InfoNode and DataNode system has an interface to reset demand and energy accumulation readings The Accumulator Resets tab allows one to reset the parameters to defined values but not to change or configure new values The notation Never reset appears to mean that the parameter values register The moment the reset parameter is activated enabled the notation will change and will reflect the date and time of last reset Under DEMAND RESETS Real or True Phase power demand Reactive power demand and Apparent power demand can be reset See Appendix E Glossary for the definitions of the various power parameter values The system maintains a running maximum known as peak demand on per phase basis and per average demand current value It also stores the date and time of each peak demand Peak demand is the maximum electrical power load consumed or produced in a defined period of time Under ENERGY ACCUMULATORS the system calculates and stores accumulated values for energy in kWHr unit reactive energy in kVarH unit and apparent energy in kVAH unit Kilowatt Hour KWHr is the equivalent energy supplied by a power of 1000 watts for one hour Watt is the unit for real power Kilovar hour kVarH is equal to 1000 reactive volt ampere hours Var is an abbreviation for volt ampere reactive It measures the integral
95. MMS contains the following property settings InfoNode NSAP refers to the OSI network address This value is the equivalent of the IP address for the InfoNode or OSI networks This value is not used and is removed as of firmware version 3 0 11 InfoNode PSEL stands for Presentation Selector with default value 00 00 00 01 InfoNode SSEL refers to Session Selector with default value 00 01 InfoNode TSEL means Transport Selector with default value 00 01 In general you do not need to change the MMS settings from their default settings The PSEL SSEL and TSEL values of the InfoNode must match those of the DataNode that the InfoNode communicates with A mismatch results in Connection Failures Signature System InfoNode Properties Values InfoNode PSEL 00000001 InfoNode SSEL 0001 InfoNode TSEL 0001 The InfoNode must be restarted in order for these settings to take effect Fic 4 gt b Generar qos a Save Setup Copyright 1999 2004 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc Al rights reserved User Agreement MMS General setup tab Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 15 Setup Page 33 Network Network contains the properties that allow the InfoNode to link DataNodes and ADAM modules to its self contained web server and user interface It is possible to communicate with the InfoNode through either LAN or modem connec tions Eac
96. MS voltage variations have their own tab relative to capturing and monitoring power quality events such as sags and swells see page 8 5 RMS Variations In addition the RMS voltage and current values can be trended using periodic readings that are stored in a journal Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a checkbox in the value field opposite Basic Metering The box enables the trending of values listed in Metering page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining 8 9 5530 5520 DataNode Setup settings are persisted but are not in effect Under SELECT JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE the various phase neutral and phase to phase parameters are displayed High and low limits can be enabled and individually set for each phase neutral and phase to phase value Note however that the available phase values depend on the Wiring Configuration selected under the Basic tab For instance for wye circuits L N N G and L L limits can be set For delta circuits only L L limits can be set Highlight the parameter value you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest NOTE The 5530 DataNode has an internal limit on the number of variables it can track for the purpose of periodic recording and limit rule eva
97. Module tab Signature System InfoNode Reports Real time Setup Properties Input Range 15 mV Save Setup Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz Bhil and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Once the Module type has been selected the remaining tabs apply to the specific Module selected The Module tab is module specific and tabs vary depending on module type 12 7 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 12 8 ADAM Handler Setup 4 Channel tab for Thermocouple General Analog Input Modules ADAM 4018 5018 w Signature System e a Reports Realtime Setup Bl Properties Values Channel Setup Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Enable Channel Name Quantity Measured Voltage Characteristic Units V Frat Channel Scale 1 0000 a Channel Offset 0 0000 40 2 Averaging Interval Seconds 60 0000 5560 DataNode 8 5571 DataNode ADA taNode Instantaneous MetOne DataNode gs PODIF Import Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement When a general purpose analog input module or thermocouple module with voltage or current range is selected the Channel Tab contains the following properties The tab shows each channel available for the selected module and range The channels are labeled Channel 0 through C
98. NENNEN ORANETZ BMI Signature System PC InfoNode User s Guide WARNING Death serious injury or fire hazard could result from improper connection of this instrument Read and understand this manual before connecting this instrument Follow all installation and operating instructions while using this instrument Connection of this instrument must be performed in compliance with the National Electrical Code ANSI NFPA 70 2002 of USA and any additional safety requirements applicable to your installation Installation operation and maintenance of this instrument must be performed by qualified personnel only The National Electrical Code defines a qualified person as one who has the skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of the elec trical equipment and installations and who has received safety training on the hazards involved Qualified personnel who work on or near exposed energized elec trical conductors must follow applicable safety related work prac tices and procedures including appropriate personal protective equipment in compliance with the Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces ANSI NFPA 70E 2004 of USA and any additional workplace safety requirements applicable to your installation Dranetz BMI 1000 New Durham Road Edison New Jersey 08818 4019 Telephone 1 800 372 6832 or 732 287 3680 Fax 732 248 1834 www draneiz bmi com Publis
99. Node status and exchanging information with the InfoNode When making changes in the different value settings of a DataNode it is recomended to uncheck the Active box first make the changes then check the Active box again Also when adding a new DataNode the Active box should be checked last to establish link with the DataNode site Click the Home page to see which DataNodes are actively communicating with the InfoNode Users also have the option to Get settings from DataNode on activation When checked the default DataNode settings will be overwritten by those contained within the DataNode displayed Remember to click the Save Setup button found at the bottom of the page to save any change that has been done To aid users a Save confirmation window appears after changes have been made and when users are about to switch to a different tab In order to use this feature you must enter the appropriate IP address via the Basic tab prior to activating Status properties also records the date and time of Last contact It also indicates the Health status whether the DataNode system is functioning normally or not and status of InfoNode to DataNode communications Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup a 2 Basic tab Properties Communications DataNode address 10 0 2 32 Password Power System PT Primarv 1 00000000 PT Secondarv 1 00000000 Base Voltaae Vrms 120 0 Wirina configuration Wv
100. OFF Voltage THD Rms HARMONICS OFF Em fe Voltage TIF Rm HARMONI V RMS Harmoni Imbalance S0 S1 NBALANCE OFF imbalance S25 UNBAANCE Or i i y pj o osiive Sequence Voltag LuhgwANE t9 T uere sao V Imbalance rms rms avg UNBALANCE OFF V Imbalance SO0 S1 NBALANCE OFF V Imbalance S2 S1 NBALANCE ON Zero Sequence Current UNBALANCE OFF Apparent Power METER Frequency METER Is TOTAL only Limits per table Reactive Power Demand METER V L Angle METER True Power Factor METER ADV METER Total no limits Rm rren TRANSIENT METER For Va Vb Vc Low and High to 30 and 110 All related values Rms Voltage RMS VARIATION For Va Vb Vc Wieda Transient Voltage TRANSIENTS ON 10 10 Crest set to 200 For Va Vb Vc H Hi to 150 Hi to 115 Lo to 85 Lo Lo to 1 ar HOUrs 10 49 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS This page intentionally left blank 10 50 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5571 5571S DataNode Setup Refer to the DataNode 5571 55718 User s Guide for more detailed information about connections and setups A 5571S DataNode 1 General tab 5571 DataNode Setup Programming Standard Tabs LEGEND Please note the following conventions used in the screen displays Items in italics are not programmable but included for information purpose to the user Items in bold are examples of what can be entered Selections avail
101. OS Status Query Screen Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS QOS Status Summary The QOS Status Summary table lists the monitoring periods weeks that fall within the selected date range for the selected DataNode s as well as how many RMS and Transient Events occurred during the monitoring periods The standard monitoring period is one complete week usually beginning Sunday 00 00 Any Time Date Query that specifies a range that would include part of a monitoring period less than one week will have that particular Evaluation Status marked as Incomplete and the Compliance marked as Undetermined For completed monitoring periods Compliance sta tus may either be PASS or FAIL A PASS or FAIL status 1s hyperlinked to the Compliance Statistical Bar Chart See text below for the description of the items contained in the QOS Status Summary table 2 QOS Status View Microsoft Internet Explorer L je x QOS Status View 11 10 2002 00 00 00 to 11 15 2002 10 32 52 Evaluation Evaluation Status Period Monitor Compllance Event Count 1111 2002 Edison SE Incompleta 10 00 00 00 5560 E 11 10 2002 Edison SE Incomplete 7 4555 p 5560 BER RMS Variation Transient Event count PASS FAIL status is hyperlinked to the Compliance Statistical Graph see page 10 6 QOS Status Summary Table Evaluation Status The evaluation status is either Complete full week or Incomplete less than a week An
102. Panel GE Lexan film daylight visible display sealed tactile feedback controls Communications RS 485 to InfoNode InfoNode supports up to 32 DataNodes 16 on each of two InfoNode COM ports InfoNode access through Internet Ethernet Intranet or dial up telephone line Additional Features External synchronization via dry contacts supports volt age and current multipliers user selected wiring configu ration communications address kW demand period and Ampere demand period 9 1 9 2 5540 DataNode Setup Programming Standard Tabs LEGEND Please note the following conventions used in the screen displays Items in italics are not programmable but included for information purpose to the user Items in bold are examples of what can be entered Selections available in drop down menu are enclosed in brackets xxxx Caution Dranetz BMI has already set default values for the various parameters in each DataNode The default values have been tested to result in optimal system performance Users are advised not to change the default value settings unless there are applications which require advanced setups 1 General tab Properties Values Identification Information Name Edison 5540 Description Serial Number Unknown Version 65535 Status Information Active Get settings from DataNode on activation O Last contact at 11 05 2002 11 33 04 Health System health is normal Gener
103. RCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Tardis 2000 is Shareware This is a complete working version There are no annoying reminder screens about what it costs and there are no disabled features If you continue Vi Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you choose No Setup will close To install Tardis 2000 Service V1 4 you must accept this agreement lt Back No Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Preparation for Use Tardis 2000 Time Server Setup continued 3 After accepting the Tardis license agreement the Readme Information screen containing detailed description of the Tardis program appears Read the program description then click Next to continue with the installation Readme Information all the time in a LAN environment correcting the clock once Tardis 2000 NT Service 4 Tardis current settings notify users of the Tardis setup type and destination folder where program will be installed To use the current settings click Next Installation of Tardis program will proceed To review and or change settings click Back When changing the destination location where software will be installed consider the availability of disk space on your computer Start Copying Files NER xj Setup has enough in
104. Real Power Dmd Total Reactive Power Dmd Total Apparent Power Dmd Total Average PF Over Last Interval Peak Real Power Dmd Total Var Dmd Coincident w Pk W Dmd VA Dmd Coincident w Pk W Dmd Avg PF Coincident w Pk W Dmd Peak Reactive Power Dmd Total W Dmd Coincident w Pk Var Dmd VA Dmd Coincident w Pk Var Dmd Avg PF Coincident w Pk Var DMd Peak Apparent Power Dmd Total W Dmd Coincident w Pk W Dmd Var Dmd Coincident w Pk VA Dmd Avg PF Coincident w Pk VA Dmd Predicted Real Power Dmd Total Predicted Reactive Power Dmd Total Predicted Apparent Power Dmd Total Current Demand A Current Demand B Current Demand C Average Current Demand Peak Current Demand A Peak Current Demand B Peak Current Demand C Average Peak Current Demand Deadband enabled Deadband 8 12 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup Demand values are computed as the average value over the demand interval which can be programmed as a different value than the periodic readings The following parameter values can be enabled individual phase and three phase total real power demand reactive demand apparent power demand average PF and peak real power values Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a checkbox in the value field opposite Demand The box enables the trending of values listed in Demand page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining s
105. Rms Interharmonic Rms Current Current TID Rms Current TID Current THD Rms Rms Voltage 420 Hz Rms Voltage 300 Hz Rms Voltage 180 Hz Rms Voltage 60 Hz Voltage TIF Rms Interharmonic Rms Voltage NINININTNI amp ISN SININININISTNISTN NN Open Link Open Link in New Window Save Target ds Print Target Save Picture As Set as Wallpaper Set as Desktop Item Copy Copy Shortcut Add to Favorites Properties Click on a Lu to produce the desired frend An A indicates that this value is not available for the device Two ways to view trend displays Left click on the check mark of the parameter you want to trend OR Right click on the check mark to display this drop down menu then click Open Link Open Link in New Window to view trend dis play V Percent Count TechSupport 5560 Harmonic Voltage 5 A Minimum Harmonic Voltage 5 TechSupport 5560 Harmonic Voltage 5 A Averag Harmonic Voltage 5 09 26 2002 00 00 00 to 09 26 2002 12 10 04 Smart Trends Base 120 0 Vrms 1 09 27 2002 00 00 00 00 TT 1 1 1 i 09 26 2002 4 00 8 00 12 00 16 00 20 00 00 00 00 00 Time Harmonic Voltage 6 A Maximum A Average Dranetz BMI Bectrotek Concepts s Harmonic Voltage A 09 26 2002 00 00 00 00 09 26 2002 12 10 04 00 1 2 307 100 _ Samples 119 eyes 257 Minimum 1 6 V 80 Z 20 7 Average 2 8 W 60 a 45 Maximum 3 7 V
106. Sag A short term RMS voltage decrease that exceeds an estab lished lower limit Secondary The output winding of a transformer Sequence Imbalance Negative sequence component divided by positive sequence Single Phase Portions of a power source that represents only a single phase of the three phases that are available Sinusoid A sine wave Surge See swell Swell A short term voltage increase that exceeds an established upper limit THD Total Harmonic Distortion A percentage describing how much a measured waveform differs from an ideal sine wave Total The phases used in computing the totals depend on the wiring configuration and parameter Typically wye and delta configurations use the three individual phases except for power related which use the IEEE 1459 equiv alent wye method Three Phase An electrical system with three different voltage lines or legs each carrying sine waves that are 120 degrees out of phase from one another Threshold The point within which the measured parameter is said to be within tolerance Total Apparent Power Square root of total WATTs squared total VARs squared Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Total Arithmetic True PF Total Real Power divided by Total Arithmetic Volt Amperes Total Arithmetic VA Arithmetic sum of individual phase volt ampere values Total Fundamental Arithmetic VA Arithmetic sum of the volt amperes of the fundamental frequency
107. The following options will appear Add Recipient or Clear Notifications Click on Add Recipients if you want to add a name in the list of recipients Click on Clear Notifications if you want to delete all names in the list of recipients Click on the Recipient Name to enter or change name and to program information about the type of recipient Note the following tabs available on the bottom portion of the viewing area ADAM 4060 E Mail Pager Right click on the recipient name if you want to Copy Recipient duplicate recipient name and properties Delete Recipient remove recipient on the list Test Recipient send test messages to recipient or Clear Notifications reset pending notifications for the recipient Notifications are dispatched to recipients in three ways through ADAM 4060 Relay outputs E Mail and or Pager Recipients must be set up before items in the Senders folder are programmed 7 5 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 6 Setup Page Click on a recipient to display the General tab properties The Recipient name provided will be used to identify recipient and will appear under the Recipients folder on the left hand frame Further Description can be added to aid in recipient identification Each recipient has a corresponding ADAM 4060 Relay outputs tab E Mail tab and Pager tab described next Note that when changing from one tab to another a save confirmation box appears to confirm whether user wants t
108. Threshold enable refers to the checkboxes opposite the limits Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son that 1s higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place For example if Total Energy is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the Total Energy goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis then the event is recorded Enabling parameters for periodic sampling make them available in the Real time tab Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 Demand tab 5560 QOS Values Enable Trending This page Demand Demand MDMDO ral Select the journal entry entries to change Real Powe
109. Wiring configuration selected under the Basic tab The DataNode provides configuration variables that specifies how many cycles to record the Instantaneous limit Peak detector limit and Waveform change magnitude limit These limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for each phase and phase to phase setting The instantaneous limit value is compared against the absolute value of each A D sample of the voltage and current channel waveforms 128 A D samples taken per cycle If any point is greater than the specified limit the cycle the trigger occurred on plus the specified number of pre and post trigger cycles will be recorded as an event Enter your limit values in the corresponding field for each phase neutral or phase to phase setting and click the Instantaneous limit enabled box to activate In earlier versions of the software this same value is used for the high frequency dual peak detectors as well The instantaneous limit is in units of Volts or Percent of base depending on the unit of thresholds selected under the Basic tab If the instantaneous limit is set at or below 100 transients are effectively disabled because a permanent trigger condition exists and locks out further events The Peak detector limit can also be set in units of Volts or Percent of base depending on the thresholds unit set under the Basic tab Since the fundamental frequency component is filtered out using the peak detector trigger mechan
110. able in drop down menu are enclosed in brackets xxxx Caution Dranetz BMI has already set default values for the various parameters in each DataNode The default values have been tested to result in optimal system per formance Users are advised not to change the default value settings unless there are applications which require advanced setups Basic Setup contains data on Communications Display Inputs and Transformer Ratios Scale Factors Properties Values Identification Information Name Edison 5571 Description Serial Number 7100UA53 Version 4H Status Information Active Get settings from DataNode on activation L1 Last contact at 11 05 2002 15 02 49 Health System health is normal General Setup contains DataNode Identification and Status information Users can enter a 30 character alphanumeric name for the DataNode detailed DataNode description such as location of DataNode and enable checkboxes to acti vate DataNode connection settings General tab parameters of the 5571 S DataNode function similarly as that of the 5530 5520 DataNode Refer to page 8 2 for the detailed description of the General tab parameters displayed above Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5571 DataNode Setup 2 Basic tab Properties Values Communications Serial Port COM2 COM1 COM 2 New Device Address 1 Present Device Address 1 Displa Display Thresholds
111. age 1 0 per unit is selected Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page Max Area Using this method the component exhibiting the maximum product of voltage deviation and duration from within tolerance is used to represent the aggregate measurement Thus the sag or swell that has the largest volt seconds area deviation from nominal voltage is selected Min V Using this method the component exhibiting the minimum voltage is used to represent the aggregate measurement Thus the largest sag is selected Max V Using this method the component exhibiting the maximum voltage is used to represent the aggregate measurement Thus the largest swell is selected 33 UPS Verification The UPS Verification Answer Module verifies the operation of a UPS or another mitigation device This requires setting pairs of DataNodes for monitoring the UPS A DataNode is installed at the input and output of the UPS This Answer Module allows for creating up to five UPS DataNode pairs The setup screen can be seen below Properties Values UPS Input Output DataNode Pairs UPS Pair 1 UPS Pair 2 UPS Pair 3 UPS Pair 4 UPS Pair 5 UPS Pair Name Demonsrtation Pair UPS Input DataNode EPQ 5530 UPS Output DataNode EPQ 5520 Delta sec for time synchronization 0 5000 Setup screen for UPS Verification UPS Pair Name This is a descriptive name for the DataNode pair monitoring the UPS UPS Input DataNode Select the DataNode m
112. age If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect Enabling this will automatically disable the high frequency dual peak detectors located in the Transients tab If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Under SAMPLE INTERVALS are two numeric edit controls the Pst Interval and the Plt Interval Pst is short term perceptibility used to set the Pst calculation interval Typical calculation is over 10 minute interval though this can be programmed Plt is long term perceptibility used to set Plt calculation interval Typical calculation is over 2 hour interval though this can also be programmed The Plt interval must be an integer multiple of the Pst interval Sliding Plt recalculates the Plt value at each Pst interval rather than only at the Plt interval Under SELECT JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE various flicker parameters can be trended using periodic readings that are stored in a journal Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup a Highlight the value parameter you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit High limit s
113. ake effect 41 gt IP S General Save Setup Copyright 1999 2004 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc Al rights reserved User Agreement NET ISP Setup tab The InfoNode uses the PAP protocol for PPP dial up connection authentication This is a simple unencrypted authentica tion protocol It is more secure than the standard web page authentication but less secure than an encryption based PPP authentication protocol You must therefore use an ISP that supports PPP dial up accounts that allow PAP authentication Most ISPs permit PAP authentication Windows 2000 server is used by some enterprises to provide remote access Windows 2000 defaults to a very secure configuration and hence does not support PAP authentication by default To enable PAP authentication on Windows 2000 server there are several configuration options that must be set PAP must be enabled in the Routing and Remote Access Service management console for the RRAS server PAP must be enabled in the RRAS policy object in the RRAS management console Clear text authentication must be permitted in the RRAS policy object Only when PAP is enabled in all three places will a Windows 2000 RRAS server authenticate a PAP authenticated PPP login In addition to this you must specify the login ID in the InfoNode using DOMAIN UserID notation for PAP authenticated logins to a Windows 2000 RRAS server This is described in the Microsoft Knowledge Base article at
114. al Arithmetic Disp PF Total Vector Disp PowerFactor Residual Curent Net Curent Enable periodic sampling High High limit enabled High High limit High limit enabled High limit Low limit enabled Low limit Low Low limit enabled Low Low limit Deadband enabled Deadband The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place For example if the Total Fundamental Frequency is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the Total Fundamental Frequency goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hys teresis then the event is recorded Values This page Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a checkbox in the value field opposite Advanced Metering The box enables the trending of values listed in Advanced Metering page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE multiple total apparent power and power factor parameters calculated using arithmetic and vector sums of the individual phases can be enabl
115. al Setup contains DataNode Identification and Status information Users can enter a 30 character alphanumeric name for the DataNode detailed DataNode description such as location of DataNode and enable checkboxes to activate DataNode connection settings General tab parameters of the 5540 DataNode function similarly as that of the 5530 5520 DataNode Refer to page 8 2 for the detailed description of the General tab parameters displayed above Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5540 DataNode Setup 2 Basic tab L Properties Values UE LAddress 10 0 0 0 01 E Polling Interval sec 300 Serial Port COM1 M1 M2 Baud Rate 9600 LLL 9600 4800 2400 1200 1 Paritv Even Even None Protocol MODBUS MODBUS ASCII Display Disolav Thresholds as Percent Volts Per Unit Percent Base Voltaae 208 0 Inputs Wirina Confiauration 4 wire L N 8 wire open delta 3 wire direct LPT Ratio OOOO CT Primary QU EODEEEEUELULLZLZGGGGIGGGGGIZEZZZUIS GIS Phase A RMS Voltaae L L or L G Phase B RMS Voltaae L L or L G Phase C RMS Voltaae L L or L G Phase A RMS Current Amps Ph BRM rrent Am Phase C RMS Current Amps Phase A Active Power KW 0 G S Phase B Active Power kW Phase C Active Power KW Total Active Power KW Phase A Reactive Power kvar LIES ESI A RA O EI ET ET ET EI Phase A Apparent Power kva Phase B Apparent P
116. and availability of HASP contact the Dranetz BMI Customer Service Department at tel nos 732 287 3680 or 1 800 372 6832 2 10 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide This chapter explains how authorized users log in and access the InfoNode system Log in Users connect to the InfoNode service using a web browser as explained on page 2 5 Before gaining access to the Home page the user must first log in using a proper user name and password If the user name or password is not correct the Enter Network Password dialog box shown below will re appear Setting up the names passwords and privilege level require administrative permission see Chapter 7 Setup Page Users section Contact your InfoNode Administrator someone with Admin privileges to set up your user account in order to access the system Only the Administrator can create accounts for other people and change Security Levels The system is shipped with a default Admin account which the Administrator should customize with your own user name and password Enter Network Password 2 x p gt Please type your user name and password Site 198 69 18 13 Realm Signature System InfoNode User Name fadmin Password A y Save this password in your password list Conai Enter Network Password dialog box NOTE When you upgrade your operating InfoNode firmware version the Signature System Java Classes will automatically be installed in your compu
117. arameter is activated enabled the notation will change and will reflect the date and time of last reset definitions of the various power parameter values The system maintains a running maximum known as peak demand on per phase basis and per average demand cur 0 n 0 mir pg 0 pir ag i ag m Values ulators Under ENERGY ACCUMULATORS the system calcu lates and stores accumulated values for energy in kWHr unit reactive energy in kVarH unit and apparent energy in kVAH unit Kilowatt Hour kWHr is the equivalent energy supplied by a power of 1000 watts for one hour Watt is the unit for real power Kilovar hour kVarH is equal to 1000 reactive volt ampere hours Var is an abbreviation for volt ampere reactive It measures the integral of the reactive power of the circuit into which the instrument is connected Var is the unit for reactive power Kilovolt ampere kVA is equivalent to 1000 volt amperes VA is the unit for apparent power Apparent power is the product of voltage and current of a single phase circuit in which the two reach their peaks at different times See Appendix F Glossary for the definitions of the various power parameter values The accumulated energy values include real power factor average three phase which is mathematically defined as demand kW demand kVA It also displays integrated Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide and total integrated reactive power The system also calcu la
118. ariation events such transition points are determined according to the following rules As per IEC and IEEE standards for multi phase systems the beginning of the event occurs when any phase goes outside the limits The start of an RMS variation event is denoted as the time one or more phases of voltage or current goes outside of the programmed high or low thresholds The end point of the event is defined as the point when all channels for which triggers are enabled have come back within limits plus internally calculated hysteresis for a minimum duration of Cycles in range to end event Until this criteria is met any subsequent excursions beyond the thresholds are considered part of the original disturbance Disturbance monitoring requires that voltage be continuously sampled and recorded only if the signals exceed specified values Most types of disturbances with the exception of voltage variations require that current be recorded as well The user also has the ability to specify how RMS trace data is recorded during the event This mechanism is found under RMS VARIATIONS SAMPLING INTERVALS where Number of rates to use refers to the number of reduced sampling rate ranges to be used to record RMS variation activities The sampling data referred to here may be any or all of the three sample rates found under INTERVALS Reduced sampling rate 1 Reduced sampling rate 2 and Reduced sampling rate 3 When one of these items is selected
119. arison that is higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Values Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in Voltage RMS Variation and Transients limits For example if Total Energy is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the Total Energy goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis then the event is recorded Enabling the parameters for periodic sampling make them appear in the Real time tab 8 11 N 5530 5520 DataNode Setup 7 Demand tab Properties Values Enable Trending This page Demand Demand MDMDUO OD o o O Select the journal entry entries to change
120. as Percent Volts Per Unit Percent Input Low Neutral Range L1 Power Tvpe Three Phase Wye Single Phase Split Single Phase Three Phase Wye Three Phase Delta Input Ferquency Hz 60 50 60 Base Voltage V rms 208 0 Voltage A Transformer Ratios Primary 1 000 Secondary 1 000 Current A Transformer Ratios Primary 1 000 Secondary 1 000 Voltage B Transformer Ratios Primary 1 000 Secondary 1 000 Current B Transformer Ratios Primary 1 000 Secondary 1 000 Voltage C Transformer Ratios Primary 1 000 Secondary 1 000 Current C Transformer Ratios Primary 1 000 Secondary 1 000 Voltage N Transformer Ratios Primary 1 000 Secondary 1 000 Current N Transformer Ratios Primary 1 000 Secondary 1 000 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide COMMUNICATIONS parameters include Serial Port either COMI or COM2 of the InfoNode New Device Address must be a unique address between 1 and 89 for each DataNode if more than one DataNode is to be connected on the same COM port they should be added one at a time trying to connect multiple units with the default address of 1 would not be successful Present Device Address either what was previously entered or the default address of 1 one if only one DataNode is connected to the COM port and the present address is unknown 0 zero can be used DISPLAY parameters include Display Thresholds as to display parameters in either volts percent or PU per unit Si
121. ast enough to have impulse characteristics and at the same time may not add or subtract significantly from the voltage to create a sag or swell Waveshape faults can be caused by loose wiring switching between two power sources etc Waveshape faults can cause damage and dis ruption to all types of loads Worst Displacement PF Displacement PF of phase with largest deviation from 1 Worst PF True PF of the individual phase with largest deviation from 1 Zero Sequence Ugg 1 3 Ua Ub Uc F Appendix This page intentionally left blank A 12 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide
122. ations cannot be undone observe caution when performing download firmware procedures 8 25 8 26 an CN gt Cn Q O ae 3 S E Un Un KO a e A JI S Fa O e CD N ce c go Properties Demand Resets Reset Real Power DMD total Never reset O Reset Reactive Power DMD total Never reset eset Apparent Power DMD total Never reset eset Peak Current Demand A Never reset Reset Peak Current Demand B Never reset Reset Peak Current Demand C Never reset eset Peak Current Demand N Never reset eset Average Peak Current Demand Never reset D aD DD D av D o ia 2 lt m D o m o G lt gt a o Ss 3 Reset Phase Energy Never reset eset Total Energy Never reset eset Integrated Reactive Power Never reset eset Total integrated Reactive Power Never reset ZU eset Forward tot fund freq WHrs Never reset eset Reverse tot fund freq WHrs Never reset D L D o D n o c c ze D lt 2 o8 oe ales Se E rm amp g p p o c 88 TT R o o PM es zz 3 e Des MES 3a o o at Reset Forward fund freq VarHrs Never reset Reset Reverse fund freq VarHrs Never reset eset Forward tot fund freq VarHrs Never reset eset Reverse tot fund freq VarHrs Never reset Reset Fundamental freq V A Hours Never reset L DL EI O 0O EJ EJ EJ Values ulators Reset Total Fund freq VA
123. aveform samples cycles Post event end RMS samples cycles Pre event end waveform samples cycles Post event end waveform samples cycles Cycles in range to end event Number of Rates to Use 3 RMS Variations Sampling Intervals Intervals Reduced sampling rate 1 Reduced sampling rate 2 Reduced sampling rate 3 Sample min max avg every N cycles 6 Number of seconds to use this rate RMS stands for root mean square a mathematical formula used to measure the average voltage and current behaviors Voltage and current activities are measured to check their behavior patterns within a set or programmed threshold Threshold is the point within which the voltage or current parameter is said to be within tolerance Thresholds are set in ranges with high limit threshold above the programmed limit and low limit threshold below the programmed limit RMS Variations result whenever voltage or current behaviors rise above or fall below the programmed thresholds Dranetz BMI instruments label RMS voltage or current variations as either sags voltage or current decreases below low limit or swells voltage or current increases above high limit as per IEEE 1159 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 6 000000 In the RMS Variations tab the following properties can be set Limits Pre and Post Event Captures RMS Variations Sampling Intervals and Intervals Under LIMITS letters A B and C represent each leg or
124. ce is used to program reduced sampling rates For 60 Hz systems a 6 cycle intervals for 8 seconds 80 samples b 30 cycle intervals for 20 seconds 40 samples c 60 cycle intervals for 90 seconds 90 samples For 50 Hz systems a 5 cycle intervals for 8 seconds 80 samples b 25 cycle intervals for 20 seconds 40 samples c 50 cycle intervals for 90 seconds 90 samples For further discussion on RMS Variation Triggering and Recording please refer to the EPQ DataNode Series User s Guide Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup a 4 Transients tab Properties Values Cvcle Counts Number of pre triaaer cvcles 1 Number of post trigger cycles 2 Individual Channel Parameters A N Voltaae phase to neutral B N Voltaae or phase to NGVO ieee aes Current displayed depend B Current upon the Wiring C Cuierant Configuration set N Current under the Basic tab Instantaneous limit enabled m Instantaneous limit 120 0 Peak detector limitenabled O Peak detector limit 100 Waveform chanae limit enabled m Waveform chanae maanitude limit 10 0 Waveform chanae duration limit 96 of cvcle 10 0 Transients are disturbances which are shorter in duration than sags and swells There are two basic types of transients 1 impulsive transients commonly caused by lightning and load switching and 2 oscillatory transients often attributed to capacitor bank switching The EPQ DataNode has extensive tra
125. ce on your computer When done click Next and proceed to Step 4 Signature System InfoNode Setup Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install Signature System InfoNode in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder Destination Folder E Dranetz BMI Signature System InfoNode Browse 4 Weld 4 There are five different InfoNode setup types to choose from depending on your application needs Select a setup type and read its description on the right side of the screen Once a setup type has been selected click Next to install the InfoNode Setup and proceed to Step 5 NOTE The Demo setup type features a sample database that contains data collected in August 2003 at Dranetz BMI s home office in Edison NJ Be sure to specify this date and time range when viewing data from the sample database Signature System InfoNode Setup x Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits your needs D Click the type of Setup you prefer Description complete installation that includes support for all DataNodes all AnswerModules and notifications lt Back Cancel Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Preparation for Use Signature System InfoNode Setup continued 5 Setup will ask if you want the InfoNode service to start automatically each
126. cific Query Setup 33 Waveform Distortion The Waveform Distortion Report is an analysis of harmonics The user may select which data type at which components they would like to include in the report The user may select Voltage THD Total Harmonic Distortion and or IEEE 519 Current TDD The user may select to present the data in trend and or histogram form The selections available are shown below iv Harmonics Components 357 1 1 13 iv THD NM iv Voltage Current If Neutrals iv Trend iv Histogram Waveform Distortion Specific Query Setup Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page 3 Energy and Demand The Energy and Demand Report of the Standard Reports is very similar in content to that of the Smart Reports The Energy and Demand Report will allow you to produce a trend table and or histogram for demand and energy An additional feature of the Standard report version is that the user may include Power data The user may elect to include real imaginary apparent power displacement power factor and true power factor calculations in a trend and or histogram form The selections available are shown in the next figure M Demand Iv Trend Demand Summary Table Iv Demand Exception Table Per Phase Iv Total M Energy Iv Trend Per Phase Iv Total Iv Net Fundamental Forward Reverse Iv Power P Q S DPF TPF Iv Trend Histogram Per Phase Iv Total Iv Net Fundamental
127. cipients tab indicate the names of recipients who are currently connected to the DataNode These recipients will receive notifications pertaining to DataNode connection described next provided the Administrator enabled granted Dispatch Notifications see page 7 5 4 4 gt P Recipients Events Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz EMI and Blectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement DataNode Recipients connection setup The Events tab contains the facility to communicate DataNode connection status to recipients Connection lost must be enabled if you want to notify recipients whenever DataNode connection is lost Connection re established must be enabled if you want to notify recipients whenever DataNode connection is restored amz Signature System InfoNode e f Setup Connection re established S o Ed E E E E E J gt pf Recipients vents Save Setup Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement DataNode Events connection setup Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page 3 Data The Recipients tab indicate the names of Recipients who are currently connected to the DataNode These Recipients will receive notifications pertaining to specified events detected by the DataNode provided the Administrator enabled grant ed Dispatch Notifications see page
128. ck the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in Voltage RMS Variation and Transients limits For example if the Voltage Harmonic RMS is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the Voltage Harmonic RMS goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis then the event is recorded All activated Harmonic parameters and value settings d
129. d 4ab Graves tinte p cance ep icesem EEE e ti sev e dre e dede 11 6 12 ADAM Handler Setup ADAM Instrument Handler Setup sees 12 1 ADAM Module Connection Setup sess 12 1 ADAM 4060 Contact Closure Module Setup sss 12 3 General abii orte tini OHIO pe Ua EEE EE ena EIE eerte ous 12 5 ELI 12 6 xvi Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 13 Contents Module biz ite omen fete ruth cete Seit 12 7 Channel tab for Thermocouple General Analog Input Modules ADAM 40187 5018 costes rrt em P Ene tox ree OIM Ce OR vena TARE 12 8 Channel tab for General Digital Input Modules ADAM 4050 4052 5050 5052 iecit ite ciese reete to testor teet eet rte ien 12 9 Channel tab for Counter Input Modules ADAM 4080 5080 12 10 Pru EEE 12 11 Optional Accessories Internal Software Options nennen nnn 13 1 ADAM Module ACCeSSOFIES ite tocide tee Ee tente HERI P ERR 13 1 Appendix A Quantities Calculated from Periodic Voltage and Current Measurements Appendix B Summary of Power Quality Variations Appendix C System Parameters Affecting Power Quality and Diagnostic Evaluations Appendix D Protocols Supported for InfoNode and DataNodes Appendix E Signature System Network Capabilities Appendix F Glossary Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide xvii Signature Syste
130. d to analyze and manage power event patterns and behavior With regard to the beginning and end of RMS variation events such transition points are determined according to the following rules As per IEC and IEEE standards for multi phase systems the beginning of the event occurs when any phase goes outside the limits The start of an RMS variation event is denoted as the time one or more phases of voltage or current goes outside of the programmed high or low thresholds The end of the event is denoted as the time all phase voltages and currents are back within the limits and the number of cycles specified within limits has been satisfied Disturbance monitoring requires that voltage be continuously sampled and recorded only if the signals exceed specified values Most types of disturbances with the exception of voltage variations require that current be recorded as well The user also has the ability to specify how RMS trace data is recorded during the event This mechanism is found under RMS VARIATIONS SAMPLING INTER VALS where Number of rates to use refer to the number of reduced sampling rate ranges to be used to record RMS variation activities The sampling data referred to here may be any or all of the three sample rates found under INTERVALS Reduced sampling rate 1 Reduced sampling rate 2 and Reduced sampling rate 3 When one of these items is selected the reduced sampling rate parameters can be set for that item Data for
131. d topics under each letter The topics are featured as hyperlinks The Contents button operates exactly like the Table of Contents in books Information is listed and organized under different headings The headings normally used here are the tab names Sub topics per heading appear as hyperlinks Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page This chapter describes the different types of reports that users can generate using the InfoNode system It explains how reports can be customized to suit the preference and needs of individual users Reports Page The Reports home page shown below displays a list of the different Smart Reports Standard Reports and Answer Module reports that are available If a 5560 DataNode is in use the Quality of Supply Compliance smart report will also be included eur Signature System InfoNode ome V S Reports time Setup E Welcome to the Reports home page The Reports Home Page provides you with a list of the different Smart Reports and Standard Reports that are available A Report differs from a View in that information is specifically formatted to be printed out There are no zooming or interactive functions as are found in the Views pages The Query Section is used to select which DataNodes and the Time Date Range of interest Once you have made those selections click the Display in This Window or Display in a New Window button to display the information ECT ET D K Ind
132. de S curit Les mesures de s curit suivantes doivent tre prises chaque fois qu un type de connexion quelconque est effec tu sur l instrument Connecter d abord la prise de terre de s curit verte terre avant d effectuer toute autre connexion Ouvrir les disjoncteurs correspondants lors d une con nexion des circuits lectriques ou des quipement de g n ration d impulsions NE PAS effectuer de connex ion d instrument sur des lignes lectriques sous tension Une fois toutes les connexions de l instrument effec tu es connecter au circuit contr ler Porter des lunettes de protection et des gants isolants pour effectuer des connexions aux circuits lectriques S assurer que les mains les chaussures et le sol soient secs lors de connexions une ligne lectrique S assurer que l unit est TEINTE avant de connecter les sondes au panneau arri re Inspecter tous les c bles avant chaque utilisation pour s assurer que les isolants ne sont pas coup s ou fendus Remplacer imm diatement tous les quipements d fectueux Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Die folgenden Sicherheitsvorkehrungen sind immer dann zu befolgen wenn eine Verbindung zum Instrument hergestellt wird Schlie en Sie zuerst die gr ne Sicherheits Erdleitung an bevor Sie eine andere Verbindung herstellen Offnen Sie beim Anschluf an elektrische Stromkreise oder Impulsausl sungseinrichtungen die entsprechen den Unterbrecher E
133. ditions Interharmonic voltage Mains signalling voltage on the supply voltage Limits for QOS Compliance to Pass Mean value over 10 seconds 1 during 95 of a week 44956 696 during 100 of a week Mean value over 10 seconds 2 during 95 of a week 15 during 10096 of a week Mean rms over 10 minutes 10 ofUn or Uc during 95 of one week 410 15 of Un during 100 of one week Mean rms over 10 minutes 10 of Un or Uc during 95 of one week 410 15 of Un during 100 of one week Plt lt 1 for 95 ofthe time Also 5 normal 10 infrequent for LV 4 amp 6 for MV No criteria specified just reported in DISDIP table 1 second for 70 of the short interruptions 1 5KV for LV 170 for solidly or impedance earth 200 unearthed of resonate earth Short duration surges 1 us Medium duration surges gt 1 to lt 100 us Long duration surges gt 100 us 10 minute mean rms values of the negative phase sequence component positive phase sequence component lt 2 during 95 each period of one week 10 minute mean rms values Individual harmonic voltage up to 25th shall be less than or equal to the value of Un given under Harmonic Compliance Limits on page 10 7 during 95 of one week lt 8 THD THD up to the 40 less than or equal to 8 No criteria specified so use same as Harmonics Individual interharmonic voltage up to 24 25th shall be less than or equal to the value of Un giv
134. e Compliance Message on DataNode Status Table An additional section featuring the non compliance status of QOS DataNodes appear in the DataNode status table The table indicates which DataNodes are not in compliance and or have undetermined compliance status for the specified interval DataNodes that are non compliant are hyperlinked to the QOS Status view r Signature System InfoNode Reports Real time Setup Welcome back admin to The InfoNode 138 with V3 0 The time is 11 15 2002 09 33 43 You were last logged on at 11 15 2002 09 25 44 KJ Introduction index The InfoNode is connected to 4 DataNodes All DataNodes are in good health The database is 5 full There are 5 disturbances Since your last time here no disturbances have been logged In the last 48 hours no disturbances have been logged Compliance There are 2 DataNodes for monitoring Quality of Supply compliance 2 of these DataNodes are reporting non compliance message on DataNode DataNode information status All DataNodes are in good health Compliance Quality of Supply For the current compliance interval the following DataNodes have an undetermined compliance message on Compliance status DataNode e 5560 198 69 18 139 WYE status table 5560 198 69 18 149 DELTA 5560 DataNode Home Page 10 3 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 10 4 5560 QOS QOS Status View QOS Status Query A new element called QOS Status has been added in th
135. e 5530 5520 DataNode Setup a 6 Revenue tab Properties Enable Trendina This paae Basic Revenue Meterina Revenue MMTRO O Select the iournal entrv entries to chanae Phase Enerav A Phase Enerav B Phase Enerav C Total Enerav Intearated Reactive Power A Intearated Reactive Power B Intearated Reactive Power C Total Intearated Reactive Power Enable periodic samplina O Hiah Hiah limit enabled a Hiah Hiah limit 135 0 Hiah limit enabled O Hiah limit 125 0 Low limitenabled O Low limit 105 0 Low Low limit enabled H Low Low limit 90 0 Deadband enabled O Deadband 3 0 Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a checkbox in the value field opposite Basic Revenue Metering The box enables the trending of values listed in Basic Revenue Metering page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Each of the individual phase and three phase total energy and integrated reactive power values found under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE can be enabled Highlight the parameter value you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for comp
136. e ingle Phase Wve Delta Soli Values ingle Phase lick fiel Steadv State Trendina PA EIUS Em to display Time between periodic samples min 5 drop down Demand Interval min 15 menu Demand Sub Interval min 5 Thresholds Instruments Thresholds set in Percent Volts Per Unit Percen The Basic tab for 5530 5520 DataNodes using Firmware V2 6 and higher contains value settings for the following Communications Power System Steady State Trending and Thresholds NOTE 5530 5520 DataNodes that use firmware versions prior to V2 6 display a Basic tab that has different functional interface than above In the prior firmware versions trending pages are hidden and users need to enable them using the checkboxes in the Basic page These checkboxes are found under Steady State Trending and it is where various hidden tabs are selected to be made visible or not The trending tabs contain the setups for related properties and are named Basic Metering Basic Revenue Metering Demand Advanced Energy Advanced Metering Unbalance and Sequence Components Harmonics and Advanced Harmonics Each of these labels has a checkbox opposite them To activate click the corresponding value field and the box is checked Basic Metering is the only hidden tab that is activated by default In subsequent firmware versions V2 6 and higher the enabling checkboxes were moved to the tabs themselves COMMUNICATIONS is where the IP information f
137. e settings are saved The date and time settings are local to the time zone specified in Regional Settings Date local 10 23 2002 Time local 16 56 38 B index aj ph General u n Don Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Setup screen for Communications Time 3 Regional Settings Regional Settings allows you to use different formatting conventions found in different parts of the world The following properties are found under the Date and Time tab Select the applicable Time zone depending on your geo graphic location Enable Disable the option to Adjust for daylight saving changes Select your preferred date and time settings to include Date separator or or Date ordering mm dd yy dd mm yy yy mm dd Time separator or and Time format 12 versus 24 hour format Under the Number tab users can set the Measurement system using the U S system or the Metric system of measurement 7 17 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 18 Setup Page 7 Answer Module Answer Modules provide different types of reports that answer specific questions about data such as whether the transient event was caused by a PF capacitor switching and whether the event occurred upstream or downstream from the monitoring point The list of Answer Modules depends upon which optional modules were purchased a
138. e COM port is supported Signature System InfoNode Reports Realtime Setup Properties Values i 4 gt Df Port set lt apan 4060 i xf Save Setup Copyright 1999 2004 Dranetz BMI and Blectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Port Setup tab ADAM 4060 tab The ADAM 4060 relay contact closure module is used to signal notifications to a third party system i e SCADA BMS Building Management System etc that can only accept relay contacts as input This portion of the setup allows for global setup of the properties that will be common to all uses of the single 4060 allowed on the system The Hex Hexadecimal Address property specifies the address of the 4060 The Contact Logic property allows specifica tion of the logic sense of the messages to be sent The default value of Positive or Normally Open means that a logical value of 1 is a closed contact and a logical 0 is an open contact Negative or Normally Closed logic means the opposite logical 1 is an open contact and logical 0 is closed The Contact Pulse Time specifies how long the contacts should be actuated to signal the notification See the ADAM 4060 tab setup screen on page 7 13 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page Signature System InfoNode up Properties Values Hex Address of 4060 00 Contact Logic Normally Open Positive Contact Pulse Time Seconds E
139. e Views page QOS Status will appear in InfoNode systems that have QOS data acquisition modules 5560 DataNode in it Click on the QOS Status to display the standard query selec tion shown below Users have the option to view QOS status data for single or multiple DataNode s Users can also select the time range or specify a time period to view data from Only data for 5560 DataNodes will be displayed in the set once the Display or Display in New Window button is clicked Once selections have been made click on either Display or Display in New Window The QOS Status Summary table shown next page is displayed Signature System InfoNode Home Views Reports Real time Setup QOS Status View Display Display in New Window DataNodes Edison 5571 Edison S MS Mag Dur mart Trends Range his wee vent Summary C From 11 15 2002 00 00 00 to 11 15 2002 10 27 13 tions Any range selected that is less than the current QOS interval length will display the current QOS interval A Refresh this page to update the selection control contents and select default values views Topics B Index Select the DataNodes of interest Hold down the Control key to select multiple DataNodes By default All DataNodes are selected Select date time range of interest Click on the Display or the Display in New Window button to initiate the query The results will appear either in this window or a new window depending on the button you click Q
140. e central component of the unique Dranetz BMI power quality and energy monitoring system can now be integrated into a computer s Windows operating system InfoNode on PC provides a centralized connection point for remote devices turning the computer into a self contained server for a user designed power monitoring network It requires the proper Dranetz BMI computer hardware lock called a HASP The user interface is a conventional Internet browser with access restricted only to users with the cor rect password The optional DataNodes serve as the data and informa tion gathering devices connected to the PC InfoNode via RS 485 422 232 or Ethernet By logging onto the InfoNode service from any PC having Internet access or access to the network in which the system operates or via modem users can obtain extensive monitoring data information and answers from all the connected DataNodes More DataNodes can be added at any time increasing the size and capabilities of the monitoring network The individual capabilities and features of each different type of DataNode are covered in their own separate user s guides Please read this and all user s guides carefully to obtain the greatest value from your power monitoring equip ment and to avoid damage and injury that can occur from misuse and improper connection xi Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Contents Preface Safety Summary eee esce a deli a n e a d e d iv POG
141. e or a combination of DataNodes opposite Remove data from DataNodes Specify the date and time range when you want the data removed from the DataNodes using Remove data at or later than or Remove data earlier than Choose one or more data types to remove Remove event data Remove periodic data Remove summary data Once the data removal selection is specified check the Enable data removal property and save the properties to start removing data When data removal is in progress all selection fields are disabled You can stop data removal by clearing the Enable data removal property and saving the properties Data removal can be a long process particularly in a busy InfoNode with large amounts of data Refresh the Data tab to see if data removal is complete Signature System InfoNode ome Reports Realtime f Setup 2s Setup Properties Enter the number of additional days to keep each data type before purging Note data is only purged when the InfoNode becomes full Changes to these values are applied as new data is recorded Keep event data Keep periodic data Keep summary data 300 Use the following items to remove data Check the Enable item and save changes to start data removal Enable data removal s Remove data from DataNodes 10 0 2119 WYE 5520 10 0 2 32 WYE 5520 10 0 2 33 WYE 5520 10 0 2 34 WYE 5560 Remove data at or later than Remove data earlier than Remove event data Remove periodic data
142. e parameter you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Threshold enable refers to the checkboxes opposite the limits Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son that is higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit 13 Advanced Harmonics tab Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place Properties Values Enable Trending This page Advanced Harmonics Individual MHAIO M Trend harmonics for phase A Trend harmonics for phase B Trend harmonics for phase C M Harmonics to Trend Phase Voltages 2 25 Neutral Voltages Phase Currents Neutral Current Interharmonics to Trend Phase Voltages Neutral Voltages Phase C
143. e stored in a journal Harmonic distortion of voltage or current is calculated through a Fourier transformation of the waveform into harmonic magnitudes and phase angle spectra These spectra are used to determine figures of merit such as total harmonic distortion THD and telephone influence factor TIF See Appendix A Quantities Calculated from Periodic Voltage and Current Measurements The InfoNode DataNode system allows simultaneous measurements of voltage and current so that harmonic power flow can be obtained Depending on value parameters set the program can record a sampling of the waveform synchronized to the fundamental frequency to ensure accurate calculation of harmonic phase angles The sampling rate is sufficient to determine up to the 50th harmonic or better A comprehensive range of high and low limits can be enabled and individually set for each measured parameter Highlight the value parameter you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son that 1s higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower t
144. e time in minutes of how often RMS and waveform snapshots will be recorded Demand interval and Demand sub interval refer to that time period used in calculating power demand values Both Demand properties can be assigned value settings within the range of 1 to 120 minutes Note however that the value set for Demand sub interval must be an integer divisor of Demand Interval since the former applies when updating certain parameters of the latter Under THRESHOLDS users can choose the threshold units under Instruments thresholds set in Click on the value field and a drop down selection of Volts Per Unit and Percent appears The limits entered in subsequent tabs will correspond to the setting made here Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup a 3 RMS Variations tab Properties Values Limits A N Voltage Bank selection enables programming limits below B N Voltage C N Voltage N G Voltage A B Voltage B C Voltage C A Voltage A Current B Current C Current N Current phase to neutral or phase to phase values displayed depend upon the Wiring Configuration set under the Basic tab Limit enabled units of measure High limit Low limit depend on setting in Basic tab Pre event start RMS samples cycles 2s EI e o _ Pre and Post Event Captures Post event start RMS samples cycles Pre event start waveform samples cycles Post event start w
145. e with admin privileges may set whether to dispatch notifications or not Users who access the InfoNode system as Guest Viewer or Operator are not allowed to dispatch notifications nor change time settings when notifications will be sent to recipients 1 The RS232 cable between COMI on the DualNode 5593T and the ADAM 232 to 485 converter is wired straight as in Dranetz BMI 8010 PQNode i e not null Modem 2 There is no need to set up an ADAM 4060 or 5060 DataNode It is just an alarm feature programmed in the Recipients section 3 Using the setup functions under Setup Page set the unit up as a recipient Recipients determine who will receive notifications 4 Enable the Dispatch Notifications field in the Recipients setup screen Go to Setup Page Notifications gt Recipients gt General tab See page 7 5 for more information on the Recipients General properties tab Signature System InfoNode Setup Notifications pending Dispatch notifications Aggregation period seconds Vj Generar Save Setup Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement 12 3 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide ADAM Handler Setup 5 The Hex value in the ADAM 4060 tab under the ADAM folder is the given HEX value of the particular 4060 viz 01 Go to Setup Page Communications gt ADAM gt ADAM 4060 tab See pages 7 12 to 7 13 for m
146. ecifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity 5530 5520 DataNode Setup 11 Harmonics tab Properties Values Enable Trending This page Harmonics MHAIO oO Percent Eddy Current Loss 8 000 Voltaae THD Fund Normalized A N Current TID Fund Normalized A Voltaae THD Fund Normalized B N Current TID Fund Normalized B Voltage THD Fund Normalized C N Current TID Fund Normalized C Voltaae THD Fund Normalized N G Current TID Fund Normalized NY Voltage THD RMS Normalized A N Current TID RMS Normalized A Voltage THD RMS Normalized B N Current TID RMS Normalized B Voltaae THD RMS Normalized C N Curent TID RMS Normalized CY Voltaae THD RMS Normalized N G Current TID RMS Normalized N Voltaae TID Fund Normalized A N Current Harmonic RMS A Voltaae TID Fund Normalized B N Current Harmonic RMS B Voltaae TID Fund Normalized C N Current Harmonic RMS C Voltaae TID Fund Normalized N G Current Harmonic RMS N Voltaae TID RMS Normalized A N Current Interharmonic RMS A Voltaae TID RMS Normalized B N Current Interharmonic RMS B Voltaae TID RMS Normalized
147. ed The data is aggregated into mini mum maximum and average values over the averaging period and stored at the end of the interval Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide ADAM Handler Setup 5 Channel tab for General Digital Input Modules ADAM 4050 4052 5050 5052 m Signature System InfoNode Home Reports Real time f Setup Properties Channel Setup Channel 0 Channel 1 ee Channel 2 kJ Battery Channel 3 Time Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel Name Enable High to Low transition trigger Low to High transition trigger 530 5520 DataNode 40 DataNode DataNode gt Df General Basic Channel Save Setup Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz BMI and Electrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement The tab shows each channel available for the selected module The channels are labeled Channel 0 through Channel n where n is the number of channels available By selecting one of the entries in the list you will be setting the parameters for that channel Note that while the channels on the ADAM units begin numbering at 0 the channel numbering here begins at 1 Input 0 maps to channel 1 input 1 maps to channel 2 etc The Enable property signals that this channel is to be monitored and stored When the channel is enabled a steady state trend entry is made at every transition from low to high or high to low The Channel Name property is used to label and select t
148. ed The parameters include Total Arithmetic VA Total Vector VA Total Fundamental Arithmetic VA Total Fundamental Vector VA True Power Factor PF Worst True PF Total Arithmetic True PF Total Vector PF Displacement PF Worst Displacement PF Average Displacement PF Total Arithmetic Displacement PF Total Vector PF Residual Current and Net Current Definitions of these terms can be found on Appendix E Glossary Highlight the parameter value you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Each parameter has five threshold limits High High High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son that is higher than the high limit Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that 1s higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that 1s lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if co
149. ed through a web browser with no software to learn and install The QOS functional components built into the 5560 DataNode are incorporated into the various tab pages of the InfoNode system The user interface employed by the 5560 DataNode is identical to that of other DataNodes except that additional monitoring and setup protocols were installed to meet the data acquisition requirements of the QOS compliance standards This Chapter describes the following QOS functional components built into the 5560 DataNode Specifications for 5560 DataNode Home Page Reporting of QOS Compliance QOS Status Views 7 QOS Status Query gt QOS Status Summary gt Compliance Statistical Graph gt Smart Views QOS Compliance Reports gt Smart Reports 7 Standard Reports Real time Display of QOS Data 5560 DataNode System Setup gt EN50160 General Setup tab 25560 DataNode Setup References to the sections above are advertently made in the other Chapters of this manual where they relate 10 1 5560 QOS 5560 DataNode Specifications Configurations External CT and voltage pods 1A 5A current with 5x overcurrent Voltages 4 channels accuracy 0 1 of reading 0 1 FS Currents 4 channels accuracy 0 1 of reading 0 1 FS Instrument Power 90 250Vac 50 60Hz optional 105 150Vdoc built in UPS with 4 year battery life Enclosure Environments Rack panel desktop NEMA 4x options 0 60 deg C standard C
150. efined can be viewed under the Real time tab For further discussion on Harmonic Distortion please refer to the EPQ DataNode Series User s Guide N 5530 5520 DataNode Setup 8 20 12 Flicker tab Properties Values Enable Trending This page Flicker Flicker MFLKO ial Sample Intervals minutes Pst Sample Interval 10 Plt Sample Interval 180 Select the journal entry entries to change Pst of last complete interval Pst of last complete interval Pst of last complete interval Plt of last complete interval Plt of last complete interval Sliding window Plt calculation Sliding window Plt calculation Output 5 Pinst peak value A Output 5 Pinst peak value B Output 5 Pinst peak value C Output 4 1 min TC LPF of Pinst A Output 4 1 min TC LPF of Pinst B Output 4 1 min TC LPF of Pinst C Output 3 square root of Pinst A Output 3 square root of Pinst B Output 3 square root of Pinst C Enable periodic sampling High High limit enabled There are three flicker values available for trending the Short term flicker or Pst the long term flicker or Plt and Plt calculated on a sliding window The other parameters shown above journal entries are used primarily for specialized testing Flicker measurements are classified per IEC 1000 4 15 Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a checkbox in the value field opposite Flicker which enables the trending of values listed in this p
151. en under Harmonic Compliance Limits on page 10 7 during 9596 of one week lt 8 THD THD up to the 39 40 3 second mean of signal voltages compared against the Meister curve Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS Smart Views Smart Views are similar to Reports of the same name While Reports are used to summarize data Smart Views are typi cally used to zoom in on data fix data properties and add change channels for data trending see page 10 10 Smart Trend Smart Trend displays timeline types of graph of a large range of parameters based on the type of DataNode and which parameters were saved for trending After using the standard query to select the DataNodes and time date range a dis play of all possible parameters that can be trended is shown Clicking a green check mark will trend that parameter for the selected phase and will also show a histogram of the different values with a cumulative probability line Red X marks indicate that the particular parameter is not available for trending In the sample screens below a 5560 DataNode is selected for display under the standard query selection Clicking on the Display or Display in New Window will show the list of parameters available for trending as the bottom screen shows Signature System InfoNode Reports Real time Smart Trends Display DataNodes Edison 5540 Edison5571 v Range Today z C From 11715 2002 00 00 00 to 11 15 2002 13 13
152. eneral Setup Tab ssssssssseeseeeeeneeneenen nennen 10 21 5560 DataNode Setup cione etie ciet iei etc tti eds 10 23 General Information 3 crie ertt eee e ee erp 10 23 Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear sssssssss 10 23 5500 DataNOde ide sees cath ade as eter E p DE nea esta v s 10 23 5560 DataNode Tabs intet ie ep EE aer RSR RSR Hate e rs Ub 10 24 Str eee 10 24 Basic lab ico a peer eR EA OT UR EUR ERIT 10 25 RMS Variations t b 5 oinGionioii dene ines ino tice ec tes 10 27 Transients rcr 10 29 IVS TUT cio METER 10 30 Revenis taD eise re trat itid iter a emer vo reves 10 32 Demand tab ioi ede E eats 10 33 Advanced Energy taD isisisi etenim tieni ri d 10 35 Advanced Metering tabs det are roe aere de 10 36 Unbalance tab cei timintio nee ies t n decedens 10 38 Hari Onis tabs EE 10 39 Elicker 3D iunii UE Fe Ir topR n AEE E 10 41 Advanced Harmonics t b erect Dee edet nire dv 10 42 Transducers tab cnc creo terreri CO ente ce deett 10 43 Adyanced t b oio unweit RR EE EEES 10 44 Accumulator Resets tab eee 10 46 EN50160 Compliance Default Trending Setup sss 10 48 11 5571 DataNode Setup General tab et tetti t et ec tdt rati eee des 11 1 Basic dab 45st Sn sti Lee oe mis 11 2 Memory rb 11 4 Thresholds tab rettet terree tre ep pepe ert dta a noct reete rh Sg 11 5 Ndyatice
153. eneral tab Properties Identification Information DataNode 1 Service Entrance Description Serial Number 53000001 Veson O O O o Status Information ew OoOo 9 Get settings from DataNode on activation Oo Last contact at 7 25 01 4 38 Health System health is normal The General tab contains identification and health status description of the DataNode IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION includes the Name and Description which users can assign for a particular DataNode type Simply click on the Name or Description value field and the cursor is set for users to type in the space provided Description typically describes the place where the DataNode hardware is located Users are allowed to enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters under the Name and Description fields The Serial Number and Version of the DataNode hardware are automatically set by default This instrument specific information is available only for viewing and cannot be altered or changed from the InfoNode NOTE The serial number represents the network MAC address of the DataNode and not its factory assigned serial number STATUS INFORMATION properties includes Active which indicates whether communications between the DataNode and the InfoNode are enabled When checked this means that the DataNode is actively communicating Values typically describes where DataNode is located MAC address enable to activate the DataNode site Data
154. eport quality of supply compliance as specified by European Standard EN50160 QOS Status will appear in InfoNode systems that have QOS data acquisition modules 5560 DataNode in it The Timeline is a two pane browser with the timeplot of selected parameters and channels in the top pane and the event list and details waveshapes in the lower pane The Smart Views include 3D RMS Mag Dur Magnitude Duration RMS Mag Dur Smart Trends Event Summary RMS Variations Snapshots and Transients Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide The Reports page is used to generate reports formatted for direct printing through Smart Reports and Standard Reports Smart Reports have pre selected output formats and include DataNode Summary Voltage Quality Energy amp Demand Event Summary and Top 10 Events Standard Reports have output formats that can be customized by the user and include Event Summaries Top 10 Events Event Statistics Quality of Supply Waveform Distortion Energy amp Demand and InfoNode Summary The Answer Modules are a customized facility which enables you to identify the source cause and time of faults or disturbances like sags and swells The system is able to record and document the source of the problem whether coming from inside your facility or in the supply from your power supplier The Real time page displays real time metered data in one of three formats Meter Panel Meter Dial and Scope Mode Meter Pane
155. eports NOTE Utility rate structures are very complex and vary greatly Therefore the Energy Usage Answer Module is not intended to completely replicate your utility bill and is intended for comparison only Peak Time Reducing consumption during peak times or shifting loads to off peak times amounts to significant savings on energy costs Energy providers typically charge different rates for energy consumption during peak time and energy consump tion during off peak times The setup for peak time is described below Properties Values m Peak Time Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunda Include Day Start Time End Time 08 00 00 19 00 00 Partial Peak Time Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunda Include Day Start Time End Time 19 00 00 22 00 00 4 gt p N Peak Time ADataNodes Rate Structures ARate Structures ki Setup screen for Energy Usage Peak Time Under Peak Time or Partial Peak Time category select the desired day for bank select click shift and check the Include Day box to enable time settings Clear the box to disable the selected days Start Time Start time refers to when the peak time begins End Time End Time refers to when the peak time ends 7 21 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page DataNodes The screen below enables users to select the DataNode site where they are monitoring energ
156. er name and password Site localhost Realm Signature System InfoNode User Name admin Password a Save this password in your password list Other computers connected to the same network can also access the InfoNode program installed on your computer To communicate with the InfoNode using a browser from another computer enter either the network name or the IP address see sample screen below of the computer running the InfoNode service in the site address field of the browser Contact your network administrator for guidance to access your network system Enter Network Password x D gt Please type your user name and password Site 198 69 18 13 Realm Signature System InfoNode User Name n SS Password Save this password in your password list Cancel Once the proper site address is entered into the web browser the InfoNode service will ask you to log on You can log on as the admin user The default password for the admin user is password Enter the user name and password into the appropriate boxes and click OK to access the InfoNode Home page Refer to Chapter 3 Home Page for details Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Preparation for Use Time Service Installation and Setup Time synchronization for the Signature System requires a reliable time source More often than not the real time clock RTC built into most computers is not accurate nor reliable In order to use the Signat
157. ers for 5560 DataNode 10 9 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS Timeline Graphs for Smart Trends As discussed in the previous page clicking on a green check mark will trend the parameter for the selected phase and will also show a histogram of the different values with a cumulative probability line Sample display screens below show timeline graphs for Long Term Flicker Pst and Short Term Flicker Plt quantities Plt Slide is also available for trend ing See page 10 41 for the list of other Flicker parameters available for trending Smart trends which are linked from the EN50160 Status View display an item for 95 CPF in the data block d Smart Trends Microsoft Internet Explorer ioj x Smart Trends 11 15 2002 00 00 00 to 11 15 2002 14 44 56 Properties gt Right click to view menu options for Edison SE 5560 035 pia other parameters For example to view 037 gola data plots of other channels select iad Copy Data p i 5 Channels and follow instructions on the 02 Ful Seale Channel Selection dialog box below 0 187 Zoom Out 0 13 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 15 2002 4 00 8 00 12 00 16 00 20 00 11 16 2002 Channel Selection 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Available Selected Long Term Flicker A Dranetz BMl Bectrotek Concepts Edison SE 5560 Long Tar Fliker Voltage A 11 15 2002 00 00 00 00 115 2002 14 44 56 00 E 27 710056 Samples 14 E 4
158. es User s Manual Copyright 1997 Advantech Co Ltd The user s manual can also be accessed online at http service advantech com tw download Files 1 A2XID Adam 4000 ed7 pdf 7 13 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page 35 WTI CAS 8 Code Activated Switch The Port Setup tab is used to enable disable communications to a 5500 Series DataNode and or GEKV DataNode Check Enable to allow communications to the specified DataNode All DataNode communications will occur on the indicated port Set the COM Port that will be used for a specified DataNode Only one RS 485 and RS 232 network on one COM port is supported The Baud Rate refers to the speed in bits per second by which the COM port processes DataNode communications requests Signature System InfoNode Reports Realtime Setup Properties Values Port Baud Rate 4j 4 gt t ph Port Setup Save Setup Copyright 1999 2004 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement COMS Port Setup tab 7 14 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page 3i MMS MMS or Manufacturing Messaging Specification is where communications address settings for the InfoNode are config ured The MMS protocol is used for connections to UCA compliant devices such as the Signature System 5520 5530 and 5560 DataNodes The InfoNode also accepts incoming MMS connections for system discovery functions
159. es cycle along with crest and waveshape triggers Supply voltage unbalance Negative phase sequence divided by positive phase sequence components Harmonic voltage As per EN61000 4 7 Interharmonic voltage As per EN61000 4 7 Mains signalling voltage on the supply voltage User selectable 5 frequencies below 3KHz Parameters measured include kVA KW True PF DPF KVAR kWhr kVAR and other power related parameters Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS Home Page Reporting of QOS Compliance The Quality of Supply compliance status for the latest complete evaluation period of each DataNode is reported via the InfoNode Home page Information about QOS compliance appears in two parts of the Home page the DataNode status paragraph and the DataNode status table NOTE Other types of DataNode EPQ 5540 etc may exist in the system QOS Status may not apply to the other DataNodes Compliance Message on DataNode Status Paragraph A report on QOS compliance appears in the DataNode status paragraph If the 5560 QOS is compliant the following message is shown There is one DataNode for monitoring Quality of Supply compliance This DataNode is reporting compliance If the QOS DataNode is non compliant or have undetermined compliance further messages appear under the DataNode status table described next The non compliance message is hyperlinked to the Quality of Supply Compliance section in the DataNode status tabl
160. eshold Low Low Threshold 0 000 0 000 Advanced tab screen display continued next page Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 9 7 l 5540 DataNode Setup 9 8 continued Enabled Low Threshold Low Low Threshold Enabled High High Threshold High Threshold Low Threshold Low Low Threshold Enabled High High Threshold High Threshold Enabled Low Threshold Low Low Threshold Enabled High High Threshold High Threshold Enabled L1 Low Threshold kVA Demand Enabled High Threshold Total Power Factor PU High Threshold 0 000 17250 000 13260 000 Advanced Setup provides you with the ability to set limits for triggering of various parameters as well as to setup other functions such as demand interval Demand Period in minutes typically 15 Average Buffer Size typically 8 Front Panel Reset Enabled check box to set Limits for each parameter typically HI HI HI LO LO LO Some parameters will only have the first two or the last two where the numbers could only be positive or negative respectively Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Introduction The 5560 QOS Quality of Supply DataNode is designed to monitor and report quality of supply compliance as specified by European Standard EN50160 The 5560 DataNode provides the full set of data required to verify compliance with EN50160 while maintaining
161. ettings are persisted but are not in effect The following parameter values can be enabled under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE individual phase and three phase total real power demand reactive demand apparent power demand average PF and peak real power values Highlight the parameter value you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on not a percent of fixed or float
162. etz Bhil and Bectrotek Concepts Inc Al rights reserved User Agreement Setup screen for Energy Expense Report Select the DataNode with which you want to generate an expense report As with the other reports specify the date and time range of interest The user may choose to divide the time range into smaller increments under the Increment window A typical selection for billing purposes is Weekly Select any Rate Structure that is enabled under the Setup Page Answer Module Energy Usage See page 7 23 of Chapter 7 Setup Page for details on the Energy Usage Rate Structures 5 10 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page A sample Energy Expense report is shown below The report is divided into four sections Energy Usage kWHr Energy Usage kvarHr Demand Max kW and Expense Summary dd Energy Expense Report Microsoft Internet Explorer Jof x H09 5530 2002 10 01 00 00 00 to 2002 11 01 00 00 00 Rate Structure Rate Structure 1 Increment Weekly Square Footage 13328 Energy Expense a ollo N 74 24 a j ol Per Sq Foot cents 163 6 18674 67 6 398 4 en e EN ul Es e e E o N Energy Usage kvarHr c TRA TESTES Per Sq Foot cents I 2lelele ejojn Ce ee eel e c SIL Demand Max kW From pays maxw Expense Summary From pavs jacar aonar TarRate Tax dollars EE So Pie ss ew Time Per Sa Foot cents 20
163. evaluated As disturbance based statistics DISDIP are simple counts of events in various ranges this information is made available at any time during an evaluation period At the end of the evaluation period the statistic calcula tions are completed and the statistical observation is marked as Complete If for some reason the evaluation period was less than a complete period the observation is marked as an Incomplete period so the reporting elements can take appropriate action All EN50160 compliance statistics are calculated from data retrieved from the DataNode journal steady state values and characterized events transients and RMS variations For all periodic quantities the total number of valid mea surements in the evaluation period is tabulated A partic ular period is excluded from the analysis if a sag below 85 of nominal or a swell above 115 of nominal occurred based on cycle by cycle RMS voltage minima and maxima For those items tabulated in the InfoNode the exclusion is based on the minimum and maximum value available in 10 minute RMS voltage min max avg trend value log The table below details the statistical information gath ered by the Answer Module Interval Parameter Data Source Additional Data Collection Magnitude of Supply duin VRMS 10 Valid Intervals Within Min Max 3 A w TS w TS Phase sce ES YES Harmonic Voltage Spectra THD 2 to 25 Harmonics Sup
164. ex Copyright 3 1999 2002 Dranetz Bhil and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Reports home page A Report differs from a View in couple of ways If a report contains multiple sections then the report will contain a Table of Contents The Table of Contents provides a summary of what is in the report and it provides a quick method for get ting to a particular section of the report thru a hyperlink A sample Table of Contents can be found next page The Reports do not allow for interactive functions but they will always be printed in their original form The Views should be used for interactive functions 5 1 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5 2 Reports Page Table of Contents 1 Sags 1 1 Top Sag Events Table 1 2 Top Sag Plots 2 Swells 2 1 Top Swell Events Table 2 2 Top Swell Plots 3 Transients 3 1 Top Transient Events Table 3 2 Top Transient Plots Top 10 Event Detail Report H09 5530 09 05 2001 00 00 00 to 09 05 2001 15 40 49 admin toc TOC1234 Sample Table of Contents 71 Smart Reports Smart Reports provides several types of reports and allows only minimal pre filtering The query setup for all Smart Reports is identical The only variance between the reports is that some allow the selection of multiple DataNodes The query setup screen seen next page is similar for all Smart Reports with its respective title 3 DataN
165. f a sequence of rapid voltage changes spaced in time close enough to stimulate the response of the eye brain is defined as flicker As the annoyance created by flicker is a function of both the intensity of Flicker and the duration of exposure the severity of the disturbance is described by two parameters the short term severity Pst and the long term severity Plt Values for the flicker parameter include the Pst of last complete interval Plt of last complete interval Plt calculated using a sliding interval maximum instantaneous P Max Pint LPF of Pisco the square root of Pinst and LPF of the square root of Pingst These values are included in the channel selection when configuringthe jpurnal recordings see Flicker Setup Tab on page 10 41 Note that only channels for which flicker data 1s present in the system are included in the selection A sample real time display parameter screen is shown below Users can choose which channels A B C N Total to activate by clicking on the respective checkbox Refer to Chapter 6 for information on how to generate meter type readings Real time Meters View Microsoft Internet Explorer oO x Edison SE 5560 A B c n Total Rms Voltage a Rms Current DiG DIC Frequency C Active Power Demand r Reactive Power Demand Ir i Apparent Power Demand r Positive Sequence Voltage aH Negative Sequence Voltage r Zero Sequence Voltage r V Unbalance S2 S1 r Vo
166. fer use the DataNode setup dGlick to use the DataNode setup display drop use the InfoNode setup down menu Passwords User Account Password TM Admin Account Password iii InfoNode Access User ID admin InfoNode Access Password Firmware Access User ID admin Firmware Access Password yiii ds One Time Operations Reset 302 Default Setup O Clear 332 Database and reboot M Do both ofthe above 0 Dont save data from next download Li Clear last journal ID o One Time Firmware Operations CAUTION These operations will copy new firmware to the DataNode Load IOP 302 firmware O Load ACP 332 firmware O Load both IOP 302 and ACP 332 firmware H Load both to all DataNodes LH Parameters under the Advanced tab allow the administrator or user to set up functions that affect communications information access and download between the InfoNode and DataNode systems The 5530 5520 can be configured to issue a UDP cross trigger broadcast message when an RMS variation and or transient occurs The 5530 5520 can also be configured to listen for such messages and cause an RMS variation or transient recording to occur regardless of whether or not its own trigger conditions for that instrument were met Under CROSS TRIGGERING a Broadcast Group ID is assigned to allow for different groups of cross trigger senders recipients The broadcast ID number in the InfoNode must match the broadcast group ID set under the TCP IP parameter of t
167. foNode Communications Setup Page tabs the General tab and Basic tab The Expert mode displays all the Setup tabs available in a particular DataNode To switch between Novice and Expert mode 1 Click on the Setup tab gt Users gt User name 2 Click on Proficiency Level to display drop down menu 3 Select between Novice and Expert mode 4 When done click on Save Setup found at the bottom of the page A Save confirmation window will pop up 5 Click on Yes to save changes or No to exit without saving changes DataNode address 198 69 18 209 Password eI Power System PT Primary 120 00000000 PT Secondary 113 50000000 Base Voltage Vrms 120 0 Wiring configuration Wye Steady State Trending Time between periodic samples min 5 Demand Interval min 15 Demand Sub Interval min 5 Thresholds Instruments thresholds set in Percent limited tab settings gt PN General gt Basic Copyright G 1999 2002 Dranetz BMI and Electrotek Concepts Inc Al rights reserved User Agreement Sample DataNode screen set under Novice mode Basic tab activated DataNode address 198 69 18 209 Password quise Power System PT Primary 120 00000000 PT Secondary 113 50000000 Base Voltage Vrms 120 0 Wiring configuration Wye Steady State Trending Time between periodic samples
168. foNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS The default InfoNode Access User ID is admin This has a matching valid InfoNode Access Password The default password is password These parameters allow access to view and change information in the InfoNode system The default Firmware Access User ID is admin This also has a matching valid Firmware Access Password These parameters allow access to view and change information in the DataNode system To change passwords simply click on the Password value fields A confirmation window appears everytime you click on the password value field The window asks whether you want to change and save a new password Parameters are also available for ONE TIME OPERA TIONS on the 5560 DataNode These one time proce dures include configuring the DataNode to its default settings and or clearing memory space by rebooting Observe caution in undertaking these procedures since they cannot be undone To return to the default DataNode settings activate the Reset 302 default setup value field To clear old data and reboot DataNode acti vate the Clear 332 Database and reboot value field To execute both procedures at one time activate Do both of the above To save memory space the administrator or user may choose to activate Don t save data from next download To discard the most recent journal ID entries activate the Clear last journal ID value field Finally parameters for downloading new or updated firmware
169. formation to start copying the program files If you want to review or change any settings click Back If you are satisfied with the settings click Next to begin copying files C AWINNT system32 User Information Name Kenneth E De Mario Company Dranetz BMI Inc Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Preparation for Use Tardis 2000 Time Server Setup continued 5 After the Tardis program is installed users have the option to view more information about the program by enabling the Readme File and or to start launch the Tardis Service immediately In most cases you should answer yes If you select Yes to launch the program Tardis Service will start immediately once you click Finish to complete setup Setup Complete Setup has finished copying files to your computer Setup will now launch the program Select your option below IV Yes want to view the README File Click Finish to complete Setup IMPORTANT YOU MUST DISABLE THE WINDOWS TIME SERVER WHEN USING TARDIS 2000 TIME SERVICE You can disable the Windows Time Server and enable the Tardis 2000 Time Server to auto start under the Service Manager Control Box To access Service Manager Control Box in Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP click on the following menu items Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services For detailed instructions on how to customize Windows 2000 XP
170. gment Up to 8 Repeater modules can be connected allowing connection of up to 256 ADAM modules YZ Bax 4080 Module 4522 Module al T E o GATE WH 4 acana 5 RSEOE 30 0 Fou g 1 GATE 5 a e A KEN p 4 Ip InfpNode IBS Male nd g o Female DATA HATA 007 D amp LA XS TTA nO 5 l 7 U E L c gt kj 2 Is Me v q 1 VDC ad ADAM 4080 Module to KYZ Box Connection For more information on ADAM Module setup installation and configuration Refer to the ADAM 4000 Series User s Manual for more details on how to configure set up and install the ADAM mod ules The Windows driver and the Utility disk for the ADAM 4000 Series are shipped along with the ADAM 4000 Series User s Manual Copyright 1997 Advantech Co Ltd The user s manual can also be accessed online at http service advantech com tw download Files 1 A2XID Adam 4000 ed7 pdf 12 2 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide ADAM Handler Setup ADAM 4060 Contact Closure Module Setup The ADAM 4060 relay contact closure module is used to signal notifications to designated recipients Data for the ADAM modules may be configured in various format one of which is the hexadecimal format The procedure below describes how to set up the optional ADAM contact module to relay notifications from DualNode 5593 to the designated recipient NOTE Only thos
171. gnature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Optional Accessories The following optional accessories are available to enhance the functions and capabilities of the InfoNode on PC Specifications are subject to change without notice Contact Dranetz BMI Customer Service for the latest information on options and accessories Internal Software Options PF Cap Directivity Answer Module SW PFCAP VAR Verifier Answer Module SW kVAR Requires SW PFCAP PF Cap Directivity SW Module RBM Indices Software Module SW RBMI Radial Line Fault SW Module SW RADL Sag Directivity SW Module SW SAG UPS Verification SW Module SW UPSV Advantech 4000 5000 ADAM Modules SW IADAM GE KV Series of Wattmeters SW Module SW GEKV ADAM Module Accessories 8 Channel Analog Input ADAM 4017 8 Channel Thermocouple General Analog Input ADAM 4018 8 Channel Thermocouple General Analog Input w memory ADAM 4018M 7 Channel Digital Input 8 ChannelDigital Output ADAM 4050 Output not supported 8 Channel Digital Input 6 differential 2 single ended ADAM 4052 16 Channel Digital Input ADAM 4053 Relay contact closure model ADAM 4060 2 Channel Counter Frequency Module up down counter mode only ADAM 4080 4 Slot Chassis ADAM 5000 8 Slot Chassis ADAM 5000E 8 Channel Analog Input ADAM 5017 7 Channel Thermocouple General Analog Input ADAM 5018 16 Channel Digital Input Output ADAM 5050 Output not supported 16 Channel Digital Input Output
172. gnature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5571 DataNode Setup INPUTS parameters include Low Neutral Range check box to enable Low Range on Neutral Voltage Channel Power Type sets the Wiring Configuration to either single phase split phase 3 phase delta 3 phase wye Input Frequency Hz either 50 or 60 Hz Base Voltage needed if using percent or per unit TRANSFORMER RATIOS include PT Ratios if the voltage inputs are connected to an external PT enter the primary and secondary values CT Ratios if the current inputs are connected to an external CT enter the primary and secondary values Memory Setup allocates memory along with number of cycles captured to different types of events 5571 DataNode Setup 3 Memory tab Enabled Cycles Per Sample Max Event Duration samples Cycles to Trigger Enabled Demand Interval min Sliding Interval min Properties Values Waveform Changes Enabled iral Cycles Before 1 Cycles After 4 RMS Events Cycles to End Impulses Enabled vi Cycles Before Cycles After Snapshots Enabled i Interval sec 10860 Timeline Enabled m Interval sec 10860 Demand Report m 15 1 5 15 30 60 15 1 5 15 30 60 WAVEFORM CHANGES parameters include Enabled Waveshape distortion enabled check box Cycles Before number of cycles before typically 1 Cycles After number of cycles after typically 4 RMS EVENTS parameters
173. h communication method requires specific configuration settings In the ISP Setup screen below the Network Setup features the settings required for the InfoNode to operate on the network The Modem Setup and ISP Setup feature the settings required for dial up networking and to establish interface links between the InfoNode and the computer s modem ESE wr Signature System InfoNode Home S Reports Real time Setup f Setup Properties Values aj PO mtr E Gateway Device Ethernet Gateway IP address 198 69 218 1 DNS IP address 0 0 0 0 Ethernet Setup Ethernet IP address Ethernet IP Mask 198 69 218 9 255 255 255 0 Modem PPP Server Setup 208 11 156 42 255 255 255 252 ISP PPP client Setup Modem IP address Modem IP Mask ISP Phone Number gional Settings ISP User ID Module ISP Password haracterizer E Mail Setup SMTP Server Address 198 69 218 70 ISP assigned Host Name george s Radial Fault Location Pa E infonode electrotek com RBM UPS Verification des Use ISP for EMAIL Ifthe InfoNode is located behind a reverse proxy or network address translation device please enter the host name in fully qualified domain name form e g infonode electrotek com or IP address to be used in the host name portion of event hyperlinks in e mail notification messages Event Link FODN IP infonode electrotek com The InfoNode must be restarted in order for these settings to t
174. hacia la informaci n espec fica S mbolos Los siguientes s mbolos de la Comisi n Internacional Electrot cnica IEC aparecen marcados en el panel superior y el posterior inmediatos al terminal o dispositivo en referencia Precauci n consulte los documentos AN adjuntos este manual Operaci n de corriente alterna ca del terminal o dispositivo Operaci n de corriente continua CC del terminal o dispositivo O Terminal de protecci n del conductor Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide vi safety Summary D finitions Les messages d AVERTISSEMENT pr viennent l utilisateur que cer taines conditions ou pratiques pourraient entrainer la mort ou des l sions corporelles Les messages de MISE EN GARDE signalent des conditions ou pra tiques susceptibles d endommager Series 5500 ses donn es d autres quipements ou biens mat riels Les messages NOTA attirent l attention sur certains renseignements sp cifiques Symboles Les symboles suivants de la Commission lectrotechnique internationale CEI figurent sur le panneau arri re sup rieur situ proximit du ter minal ou de l unit cit A Mise en garde consultez les documents d accompagnement ce manual Fonctionnement du terminal ou du dispositif sur le courant alternatif c a Fonctionnement du terminal ou de unit courant continu CC Borne conductrice de protection Signature Syste
175. han the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place For example if the Voltage Harmonic RMS is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the Voltage Harmonic RMS goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis then the event is recorded All activated Harmonic parameters and value settings defined can be viewed under the Real time tab Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 12 Flicker tab 5560 QOS Pst of last complete interval A Pst of last complete interval B Pst of last complete interval C Plt of last complete interval A Plt of last complete interval B Plt of last complete interval C Sliding window Ptt calculation A Sliding window Ptt calculation B Sliding window Plt calculation C Output 5 Pinst peak value A Output 5 Pinst peak value B Output 5 Pinst peak value C Output 4 1 min TC LPF of Pinst A Output 4 1 min TC LPF of Pinst B Output 4 1 min TC LPF of Pinst
176. hannel n where n is the number of channels available By selecting one of the entries in the list you will be setting the parameters for that channel The Enable property signals that the selected channel is to be monitored and stored The Channel Name property is used to label and select this channel in other interfaces in the InfoNode Any arbitrary name with up to 80 characters can be specified The Quantity Measured Characteristic and Units properties are used to define the channel type in the InfoNode data base An example might be Voltage Quantity Measured Instantaneous Sampled Characteristic and Volts Units The Channel Scale property specifies the number used to scale the value read from the ADAM Module This depends on the transducers that are measuring the real signal For instance a speed sensor might output 1 Volt per 50 rpm which would give a Channel Scale of 50 The Channel Offset property allows an offset to be applied to the signal measured from ADAM module This must be specified in scaled units If a pressure transducer were to output 0 volts at 1000 mbar and you desire a reading of 1000 mbar specify 1000 for the offset assuming the appropriate scale was specified in the Channel Scale to convert input sig nal to mbar The Averaging Interval property is used to tell the system how often to store values for this unit The signals are sam pled as quickly as the system can depending upon the number of instruments attach
177. hase rotation of the voltage channels and then match up the current channels The 5560 DataNode will swap voltage phases to ensure posi tive sequence phase rotation counter clockwise according to IEEE definitions and then swap and invert current channels to match Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Channel mapping is used to correct for errors in wiring the instrument to the circuit If a mistake is made such as an inverted CT or a phase is connected to the wrong channel it can be corrected in software instead of changing the wiring to the instrument Note that it 1s recommended that the actual wiring be changed but channel mapping can correct the problem if this is not practical A channel mapping array is provided to permit manual configuration of channel swapping and inversion Under CHANNEL MAPPING click on the corresponding voltage or current phase to show which channel the Signal is connected to Click and enable the value field opposite Channel is inverted to as it applies The channel mapping array works by specifying a numeric code in each array slot that indicates which phase 1s connected to the physical 5560 DataNode channel 10 43 5560 QOS Normally the channels and phases are matched as shown The DataNode employs two A D converters to sample the below Channels can be swapped and or inverted to voltage and current channels for a given phase simultaneous correct recurring mistakes ly Measurement erro
178. he Datanode The DataNode also uses this ID mechanism for multiple DataNode cross triggering and is guaranteed only on an un routed network The group ID is sent along with the broadcast message and only those receivers with the same group ID will respond to the broadcast if so enabled The broadcast address can be specified to send a broadcast to a directed address other than the local network if desired However results cannot be guaranteed and data may be lost if the message takes too long to arrive at its destination Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup a Checkboxes are seen opposite the next four items Enable sending rms trigger Enable responding to received rms trigger Enable sending transient trigger Enable responding to received transient trigger The user specifies which event types are generated and or listened for through these checkboxes When said parameters are activated the system in effect utilizes trigger messages as trip signals If Broadcast address is empty message broadcast is routed through the local network The user specifies a group ID and optionally a broadcast address Under COMMUNICATIONS users are given the option to return to the default InfoNode or DataNode settings When configurations differ and communication errors occur Access privileges are determined under PASSWORDS The passwords entered in the InfoNode system must match the ones stored under the Password secti
179. he Name or Description value field to type in the space provided The Name property is used to identi fy the instrument within the InfoNode and when data is downloaded from the InfoNode The Description field allows a longer more meaningful description string to be associated with the instrument The Serial Number and Version of the DataNode hardware are not available and will show as None The InfoNode supplies this information after establishing communications with the instrument This instrument specific information is available only for viewing and cannot be changed from the InfoNode STATUS INFORMATION properties include the Active checkbox that indicates when the instrument should be online and available for communications and download The Get settings from DataNode on activation property is not avail able for ADAM modules The InfoNode records the date and time of Last contact with the instrument It also indicates Health status whether the system is functioning normally or not Both information are set by default and cannot be changed by users The InfoNode supplies both contact and health information after establishing communications with the instrument Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 12 5 12 6 ADAM Handler Setup 2 Basic tab EEEwr Signature System InfoNode Properties Communications Module Address 1 5000 Series Slot Number 0 server ation 4 aa General Basic
180. he left hand frame contains the interactive tree from which users can view the setup information they need The Setup tree can be expanded or collapsed Click on the plus sign to further expand the tree and show more of the options available Click on the minus sign to col lapse the tree back up one level The Users section includes Guest Viewer Operator and Admin User An Admin User can add new users by right clicking the mouse while the cursor is over the User folder Only the Admin User can create accounts for others and change Security Levels Once the accounts are created the other types of User can change the User Name Password and Proficiency Level User Name up to 30 alphanumeric characters can be entered for the name Password up to 12 alphanumeric characters can be used for the password A confirmation window pops up to verify the password before proceeding Description usually contains descriptive nature of the account created for a particular user Security Level can only be assigned by someone with Admin privileges Proficiency Level select either Novice or Expert user where the setting will determine which types of reports and views will be displayed In order for a new user to access the system the system administrator someone with Admin privileges must first set up an account for the new user The system is shipped with default Admin Guest and other accounts which the system administrator should custo
181. he screen displays LEGEND Items in italics are not programmable but included for information purpose to the user Items in bold are examples of what can be entered Selections available in drop down menu are enclosed in brackets xxxx Caution Dranetz BMI has already set default values for the various parameters in each DataNode The default values have been tested to result in optimal system performance Users are advised not to change the default value settings except user defined properties 1 e Name IP Address etc unless there are applications which require advanced setups 1 General tab Properties Values Identification Information typically Name Edison SE 5560 describes Descripti Service Entrance where Sa DataNode is located Serial Number 00 01 32 00 01 b9 Version E1 0 238000714 Status Information pues Acive establish link Getsettings from DataNode on activation LI with the Last contact at 08 01 2002 13 03 08 DataNode site Health System health is normal The General tab contains identification and performance status description of the DataNode IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION includes the Name and Description which users can assign for a particular DataNode type Simply click on the Name or Description field to type in the space provided Description typically describes the location where the DataNode is monitoring Users are allowed to enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters under the Name and Desc
182. hed by Dranetz BMI 1000 New Durham Road Edison NJ 08818 4019 USA Telephone 1 800 372 6832 or 732 287 3680 Fax 732 248 1834 Web site www dranetz bmi com InfoNode DataNode Signature System and Node Center are registered trademarks of Dranetz BMI Answer Module is a registered trademark of Electrotek Concepts CopyrightO 2004 Dranetz BMI All rights reserved No part of this book may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transcribed in any form or by any means electronic mechanical photocopying recording or otherwise without prior written permission from the publisher Dranetz BMI Edison NJ 05818 4019 Printed in the United States of America US Pat Nos 4 694 402 5 481 468 5 574 654 5 933 092 5 862 391 P N UG PC INFONODE Rev A 5 764 155 5 696 501 5 768 148 safety Summary ADVERTENCIA Una conexi n incorrecta de este instrumento puede producir la muerte lesiones graves y riesgo de incen dio Lea y entienda este manual antes de conectar Observe todas las instrucciones de instalaci n y operaci n durante el uso de este instrumento La conexi n de este instrumento debe ser hecha de acuerdo con las normas del C digo El ctrico Nacional ANSI NFPA 70 2002 de EE UU adem s de cualquier otra norma de seguridad correspondiente a su establecimiento La instalaci n operaci n y mantenimiento de este instrumento debe ser realizada por personal calificado solamente El C digo El ctrico Nacio
183. hen sourced from the DataNode settings First is through the that particular DataNode information was captured Once QOS Status which displays data relative to quality of you have made those selections click on either the supply compliance QOS Status appears in InfoNode Display or Display in New Window button to view the systems that have 5560 DataNode in use See page 10 4 information that you are interested in for information on QOS Status Second is through Timeline featuring graphs of user selected parameters The Timeline option displays a graph of user selected over user selected time periods Third is through the parameters over a user selected time period For some Smart Views featuring different views of data that have parameters the minimum maximum and average values been pre filtered or specified based on typical uses of are plotted along with event markers that indicate detailed other Dranetz BMI products These include magnitude waveform information also available at that specific time versus duration graphs lists of all events or only those The lower portion of the screen displays a list of events events that are classified by IEEE 1159 as RMS varia recorded over that time period tions or transients Smart Views are similar to Reports of the same name The left window pane contains the tree directory which except that they are designed to be viewed onscreen presents the QOS Status if 5560 DataNode is in use see instead of pri
184. here Data for Programmed Settings Appear ssenne 8 1 Programming the Tabs iiis oen eui eiie i ie deas 8 2 Generalities snie e e DM ODER E ERES 8 2 Basic tabs iioii titi died eret EORR ORDER ee REOR aa ee 8 3 RMS Variations aD trc rone ie bep to Ret E peius 8 5 Transients T3buss stint ooi oret e par UE D Or POS 8 7 Metering t b iiisa seio ie tes REC RE A EEA n ERES cntiees 8 9 Revenue ta Dechert soc me tuU Se E Td says 8 11 Demand tab nueces ote stats Hedi eT Mi aoe 8 11 Adyanced Energy tab iioii prr REN DRE EUR ERE UPC PER ER ERR dE 8 14 Advanced Melering ab co etait do ta berti Dep 8 16 Unbalance tab ioa ce cec eie ode t eter ive ende reds 8 17 Harmonies tab i scesiesstspend 8 18 Flicker tabs ento PHI HERI Oni a hdmi 8 20 Advanced Harmonics tab eb t tt ede Ip beg S 8 21 Transducers tab etie ret uro E b rp e e hard 8 22 Advanced tab cett ato rer rede GE e eve ar b ro eats 824 Accumulator Resets 13D oie teneri ERR REL 8 26 Summary of EPQ DataNode Setup Parameters and Tabs Where They Can Be Found sesseseeeneeeeeee 8 28 9 5540 Energy Management EM DataNode Setup Recommended Setup before connecting to an InfoNode 9 1 Specifications for 5540 EM DataNode sse 9 1 General t3Di c sro aM Dn A errr Teeny 9 2 Basic tabisci of cstestsctess abides Sate tien identities ae EM RERO ER EE Rex 9 3 Advanced t b ii ee ERREUR
185. his channel in other interfaces of the InfoNode Any arbitrary name with up to 80 characters can be specified The Hi to lo transition trigger property when checked will cause an event to be generated whenever the signal transi tions from a logical to a logical 0 The Lo to hi transition trigger property when checked will cause an event to be generated whenever the input signal transitions from a logical 0 to logical 1 12 9 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 12 10 ADAM Handler Setup 6 Channel tab for Counter Input Modules ADAM 4080 5080 e Signature System InfoNode Real time Setup Properties Channel 0 Channel 1 Service Entrance Data Recording Type Accumulator Quantity Measured Eneray Characteristic Real Integrated wn Generic 4000 0000 0 0000 60 0000 Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement The tab shows each channel available for the selected module and range The channels are labeled Channel 0 through Channel n where n is the number of channels available By selecting one of the entries in the list you will be setting the parameters for that channel The Enable property signals that the selected channel is to be monitored and stored The Channel Name property is used to label and select the channel in other interfaces of the InfoNode Any arbitrary name
186. iah limitenabled O Hiah limit 125 0 Low limit enabled m Low limit 105 0 Low Low limit enabled d Low Low limit 90 0 Deadband enabled O Deadband 3 0 Values Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a checkbox in the value field opposite Advanced Metering The box enables the trending of values listed in Advanced Metering page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE multiple total apparent power and power factor parameters calculated using arithmetic and vector sums of the individual phases can be enabled Highlight the parameter value you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Each parameter has five threshold limits High High High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be g
187. ight to distinguish it from the min max lines 2 Graphs will show any timed readings limit crossing or threshold triggered events that occurred during the selected time range These are indicated by an Event Marker on the horizontal time axis Click on the event marker to display the Event Detail in the lower portion of the screen 3 Graphs support zooming via a rectangle drag Zooming in on specific data can be done in both the hor izontal and vertical axis Position the cursor into the graph area at one of the corners of the area of interest and depress the left mouse button while dragging the cursor towards the opposite corner of the area of interest A box will appear as the mouse is moved indicating the area being selected Once the selection is complete release the left mouse button The display will be resized to show the area of interest 7 Timeline View Microsoft Internet Explorer BEES Timeline View All time DataNode 141 different line weights distinguish min max and avg values 0 357 Base 207 8 Vims 0 37 MEUM V Percent o ij 5 1 5157 i Print Axis Mem te o Copy Image Line Options 12 00 00 00 Copy Data 4 Channels Rms Voltage Minimum AB Full Scal P Maximum AB comme Rms Voltage Average AB ea Oranetz BMIGVBectrotek Concepts Zoom Out TANAAN ANAN TAA RA right click on the graph then select General to open dialog box right click on the graph then select Channels
188. ights reserved User Agreement Recipient ADAM 4060 notification setup Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page Click on the Email tab The Enable Email must be checked to allow notifications to be sent to the recipient s email address Type in the recipient s electronic mail Address in the space provided v kdemario dranetz bmi com Df General ADAM 4060 Eai Pager af f Save Setup Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc Al rights reserved User Agreement Recipient Email notification setup Click on the Pager tab The Enable Pager must be checked to allow notifications to be sent to the recipient s pager unit Type in the corresponding Pager Number and PIN Number where notification signals will be sent 9 7322484377 r n Node Df General ADA 4060 E Mail Pager ul Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Recipient Pager notification setup 73 Senders The Senders section branches out into DataNodes and InfoNodes Z DataNodes each DataNode has its own unique identification and is monitored on their Connection status whether connection is lost or re established and on the Data that they register Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide setup Page 33 Connection The Re
189. ime Specifies the time of day when the statistics will be reset Time is an edit box that defaults to 00 00 00 midnight of Sunday according to standard Click on the value field to change time Length Allows the user to set the evaluation period to a value other than the EN50160 specified period of 1 week Users are cautioned against changing this value as this will result in a non standard evaluation The default is 1 week 10 21 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 10 22 5560 QOS EN50160 Calculations and Statistics This section lists the calculations and statistics that are gathered from incoming data and processed by the EN50160 Answer Module For each 5560 DataNode configured in the system the Answer Module compiles the required statistics and per sists them to the database for retrieval under the Views and Reports pages of the InfoNode The partial statistics are persisted as each set of incoming data is analyzed so that partial period statistics are available even though it cannot predict that a site will pass in compliance until interval is complete Intermediate statistics for the current evaluation period are made available but are marked as incomplete Early in an evaluation period there may not be enough data to provide meaningful statistics and Pass Fail evaluations for the various criteria Due to this fact partial statistics are not available until at least 100 valid samples have been accumulated and
190. imum Magnitude The minimum magnitude is defined as a percent of normal that defines this category Maximum Magnitude The maximum magnitude is defined as percent of normal that defines this category Category Name The category name describes the defined category 3i EN50160 EN50160 is a European product standard for voltage characteristics in public distribution networks The EN50160 requires a 5560 QOS Quality of Supply DataNode for data acquisition As per EN50160 the QOS compliance evalua tion period is one week beginning at midnight on Sunday These can be altered using the EN50160 setup properties however the system would no longer be calculating the information in strict compliance with the standard The EN50160 Setup properties include Start day and Start time where users can program their preferred day and time when they want the evaluation period to commence Users can also set the Length of the evaluation period in days weeks or months Refer to Chapter 10 5560 QOS for more discussion on the 5560 DataNode Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page 3 Energy Usage The Signature System InfoNode provides users the ability to track power flow and generate reports for the purpose of monitoring energy usage and expense The setup necessary for the expense reports has three sections namely Peak Time DataNode and Rate Structures See page 5 8 of Chapter 5 Reports Page for details on the energy expense and usage r
191. in 1000 ft 02 28 2000 11 23 13 CDRWest Mag 19797 24 Duration 0 17 secs 3Phase Fault 22 18 in 1000 amp 22 18 in 1000 ft 03 18 2000 03 09 37 CDRWest Mag 19725 27 Duration 0 17 secs LLF at Phase BC 34007 in 1000 amp 35 59 in 1000 ft 03 21 2000 16 41 32 CDRWest Mag 14587 99V Duration 0 17 secs SLG at Phase A 20 45 in 1000 amp 21 43 in 1000 amp 03 29 2000 10 12 42 CDRWest Mag 18521 32 Duration 0 17 secs SLG at Phase A 34 48 in 1000 fi 3574 in 1000 ft 04 06 2000 04 41 44 CDRWest Mag 19733 14 Duration 0 17 secs SLG atPhase B 24 50 in 1000 amp 25 57 in 1000 ft 04 29 2000 19 19 46 CDR West Magm 20153 18V Duration 0 17 secs SLG atPhase C 18 71 in 1000 8 19 63 in 1000 05 08 2000 01 21 49 CDRWest Mag 19936 19V Durstion 0 17 secs SLG atPhase C 2596 in 10008 27 06 Gin 1000 f 06 01 2000 21 59 14 CDRWest Magm 32479 91V Duration 0 17 secs DLG at Phase CA 23 10 in 1000 amp 23 10 in 1000 amp 06 12 2000 13 59 17 CDRWest Mag 16093 22 Duration 0 17 secs DLG at Phase AB 2095 in 1000 ft 20 95 in 1000 ft 06 23 2000 12 20 28 CDRWest Mag 26828 52 Duration 0 17 secs LLF at Phase CA 23 74 in 1000 ft 25 04 in 1000 amp 06 29 2000 05 26 30 CDRWest Mag 31307 88 Duration 0 17 secs SLG at Phase A 22 33 in 1000 amp 23 40 in 1000 f 07 08 2000 11 29 32 CDRWest Mag 30636 30 Duration 0 17 secs SLG atPhase A 3631 in 1000 8 37 64 in 1000 ft 07 29 2000 2
192. inate when an event is seen at the input DataNode and no event is seen on the output DataNode The status is Indeterminate because no cross triggered event was seen to verify that the output DataNode itself is functioning correctly The report consists of a table with event summary information for both the input and output DataNodes of the UPS Pairs and status information The report also contains a Mag Dur plot with data from both DataNode marked separately A sample report can be seen below ttkk xx A o 8 ORANETZ 09 01 2001 00 00 00 to 09 03 lt lt DMI en E 2001 17 06 49 T admin Event is Ti DataNode INPUT MONITOR OUTPUT MONITOR Status Pairs Event Type Phase Charateristics Event Type Phase Charateristics Mag 407 V 1 04pu 09 03 Max Deviation Peak to 2001 Demo Transient A Peal 50 7 139 Non Event NA NA Indeterminate 05 00 16 Dur 0 004 s 0 23 cyc Er Upstream Capacitor Switching Mag 405 V 1 03pu 09 03 Max Deviation Peak to 2001 Demo Transient B Peu 29 V 0 07pw Non Event NA NA Indeterminate 05 00 16 Dur 0 003 s 0 16 cyc Us Upstream Capacitor Switching 09 02 Mag 247 V 0 89pu 2000 Demo instantaneous Dur 00256020 cyc wes peers NA NA Indeterminate Ak Sag Category 2 Upstream 18 46 56 Sag M Mag 368 5V 0 94pu Pal Instantaneous Das 0 Sh Waga Pliz eae ee 2001 Demo Sa B Cate a 3 U straan Transient B Peak 1242V 0 32pu FAIL 13 16 00 E 8 Tue P Dur 0
193. ing base as can be used in Voltage RMS Variation and Transients limits For example if Real Power Demand is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the Real Power Demand goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis then the event is recorded 5530 5520 DataNode Setup 8 Advanced Energy tab Enable Trending This page Advanced Energy Adv Aneragy MFLOO Li Select the journal entry entries to change Forward fund freq WHrs A Forward fund freq WHrs B Forward fund freq WHrs C Reverse fund freq WHrs A Reverse fund freq WHrs B Reverse fund freq WHrs C Forward tot fund freq WHrs Reverse tot fund freq WHrs Forward fund freq VarHrs A Forward fund freq VarHrs B Forward fund freq VarHrs C Reverse fund freq VarHrs A Reverse fund freq VarHrs B Reverse fund freq VarHrs C Forward tot fund freq VarHrs Reverse tot fund freq VarHrs Fundamental freq VA hours A Fundamental freq VA hours B Fundamental freq VA hours C Total fundamental freq VA hours Enable periodic sampling Hiah High limit High limit enabled High limit Low limit enabled Low limit Low Low limit enabled Low Low limit 8 14 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup The Advanced Energy tab shows various energy parameters on per phase and t
194. ism peak detector limits set below 100 can be specified Other configuration variables that determine the operation of transient capture capability of the DataNode are the waveform trigger parameter instantaneous peak waveform trigger level and dual peak high frequency detector output trigger level Values for these parameters are set under Waveform change magnitude limit and Waveform change duration limit Normally the default values for these is 10 These limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for each phase and phase to phase setting To activate the waveform limit values click the Waveform change limit enabled box For further discussion on Transient Event Recording refer to the EPQ DataNode Series User s Guide Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup a Trending Tabs The following tabs are known as trending pages Metering Revenue Demand Advanced Energy Advanced Metering Imbalance Harmonics Flicker and Advanced Harmonics These tabs contain an enable disable checkbox at the top of the page The purpose of the checkbox on any trending page is to enable trending of properties and values listed on that page If the box is checked the settings on that page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect For DataNodes using Firmware V2 6 and higher all trending pages are displayed For DataNodes using firmware versions prio
195. it Base Voltage needed if using percent or per unit Base Power needed if using percent or per unit INPUTS parameters include the following Wiring Configuration set to either 3 wire open delta 4 wire Line to Neutral 3 wire direct or 4 wire L L PT Ratio if the voltage inputs are connected to an exter nal PT CT Primary the maximum nominal current on the pri mary side of the CT the secondary ratio is determined by the version of the instrument in use 9 4 00 OF BLBIIIITI REGISTERS parameters include the following Registers check boxes to select those to save for trending RMS Voltage and Current Active Power in kilowatts Reactive Power in kVARs Apparent Power in kVA Power Factor Frequency in Hz Total Energy Flow three phase sum of the real or active energy flowing from the source to the load positive and from the load to the source negative in kWhr Total Reactive Integrated Power Flow three phase sum of the reactive energy flowing from the source to the load positive and from the load to the source negative in kVARhr Total Apparent Integrated Power Flow three phase sum of the apparent energy flowing in kVAhr KW Demand average real or active power over the demand interval KVA Demand average apparent power over the demand interval Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5540 DataNode Setup 0 3 Advanced tab Properties Values Reset Accumulators on Next Connect L1
196. l shows a textual list of metered parameters for the selected DataNode Parameters displayed are those configured for logging and trending Meter Dial shows the same information as Meter Panel but in an analog meter dial format Scope Mode shows real time waveforms for all enabled channels in an oscilloscope type of display Note that Scope Mode is not available for all DataNode types The Setup page allows the user to configure both the InfoNode and any DataNodes connected to it Additional users and their access permissions and passwords are programmed on this page Additional DataNodes connected to the InfoNode are also set up on this page Other parameters which you can view and or customize depending on your user access privilege are Notifications Communications Answer Module DataNodes Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide PC InfoNode Overview InfoNode Access Levels The InfoNode firmware can function at different security levels Guest Viewer Operator and Administrator Guest Can view data only Cannot change any settings or data Viewer Can view data and change their own password and display settings Operator Can change DataNode settings e g instrument thresholds upload and delete measurements Administrator Full access to all settings e g Network Time Locale Users NOTE The Administrator mode is accessible only to users with administrative privileges This mode is not normally used exce
197. le 10 29 2003 12 06 PM 52 KB InstallShield Media H 10 29 2003 12 06 PM 7 907 KB Winzip File 10 29 2003 12 06 PM 337 KB EX File 9 5 2001 2 24 AM 1 KB BIN File 10 29 2003 12 06 PM 81 KB Windows BMP Image 10 29 2003 10 55 AM 45 KB Application 5 16 2000 2 37 PM 1KB Configuration Settings 10 29 2003 12 06 PM 132KB INXFile 10 29 2003 12 06 PM jm vssver scc 1KB Microsoft SourceSafe 10 29 2003 12 10 PM Type Application Size 45 0 KB l480KB E My Computer 2 1 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 2 2 Preparation for Use Signature System InfoNode Setup 1 The InfoNode Setup program initially displays the Welcome screen Read the message then click Next to continue Signature System InfoNode Setup xi Welcome to the Signature System InfoNode Setup Program This program will install the InfoNode service on your computer The InfoNode service will operate for a trial period of 30 days After the trial period you must install a HASP on your computer to continue to use the service Signature System InfoNode Setup License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement Neither Dranetz BMI nor any independent provider transmitter of Information shall be liable 4 in any way and you agree to indemnify and hold harmless Dranetz BMI and the independent providers transmitters for 1 any i
198. le is for substation applications only The Answer Module is an add on to the PF Capacitor switching module and determines if the kvar change is balanced or unbalanced The setup required for this Answer Module is described below Properties Values kvar balance threshold between phases 0 1000 Setup screen for kvar Change Observer Activate kvar Change Observer Check the box to activate or clear the box to deactivate kvar balance threshold between phase If the difference between the phases is greater than the set threshold the kvar change is unbalanced 73 Radial Fault Location Identifies the source of radial line faults as they occur The Radial Fault Location estimates the distance to a fault loca tion allowing a quick dispatch of linemen for repairs reducing the time for locating problem source Required input data are the three phase voltage and current waveforms along with the positive and zero sequence impedance of the primary feeder An optional input datum is the feeder length The setup screen can be seen below Properties Values Activate AnswerModule Ground fault pickup current threshold amperes 150 0000 Phase fault pickup current threshold amperes 800 0000 Ratio of fault peak current to pre fault peak current 2 0000 Sequence impedance unit Ohms per 1000 ft Length of primary feeder unit is based on the unit length in sequence impedance unit 120 0000 Positive imped f the pri feed I ositive
199. lection control contents and select default values Select the DataNodes of interest Hold down the Control key to select multiple DataNodes By default All DataNodes are selected Select date time range of interest Click on the Display or the Display in New Window button to initiate the query The results will appear either in this window or a new window depending on the button you click Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz Bhil and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Setup screen for Aggregated Energy Expense Report Select the DataNodes to aggregate in the expense report under the DataNodes window As with the other reports specify the date and time range of interest Click on the Compare button if you want to compare the total of the aggregated DataNodes to that of another DataNode Click on the Aggregate Only button if you simply want to view the aggregate total Select any Rate Structure that is enabled under the Setup Page Answer Module Energy Usage See page 7 23 of Chapter 7 Setup Page for details on the Energy Usage Rate Structures If doing a comparison select the desired DataNode under the Comparison DataNode window NOTE If a comparison is being performed the comparison DataNode will not be included in the aggregation even if selected Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page A sample Aggregated Energy Expense report is shown below The report is divided into fou
200. led disabled for that particular parameter This means that once an enabled parameter has exceeded the threshold limit an event will be registered This selective enabling process allows users more control over the event notifications they receive and prevent the processing of unwanted data Properties Enable Threshold Crossing Notification lv Threshold Registers Interharmonic Voltage Interharmonic Current Rims Voltage Rims Current To High High Te High To Normal ToLow To Low Low Save Setup Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Blectrotek Concepts Inc Al rights reserved User Agreement DataNode Parameter Threshold Crossing notification setup Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page 73 InfoNodes contains notifications re garding InfoNode system shutdown and start up 3 Shutdown The InfoNode Recipients tab indicates the names of recipients who will receive notifications when the InfoNode shuts down operation See page 7 5 for the procedure on how to add delete recipients ESE w Signature System InfoNode time Setup ome ajs Dh Recipients 3 Save Setup Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz EMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement InfoNode Shutdown notification setup s Start up The InfoNode Recipients tab indicate
201. ling Tardis 2000 Time Server Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Preparation for Use Tardis 2000 Time Server Setup 1 The Tardis installation program initially displays the Welcome screen Read the message then click Next to continue NOTE Exit all Windows programs before attempting to install Tardis 2000 Time Server in your computer Welcome to the Tardis 2000 Service V1 4 Setup program This program will install Tardis 2000 Service V1 4 on your computer lt is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under law ee co orem d 2 Read the Tardis license agreement terms then click Yes to accept and continue with the installation Software License Agreement X Please read the following License Agreement Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement right 1994 2002 H C Mingham Smith Ltd The author THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF ME
202. lowing properties can be set in the RMS Variations page Limits Pre and Post Event Captures RMS Variations Sampling Intervals and Intervals Under LIMITS letters A B and C represent each leg or phase of a three phase system while letter N represents the neutral conductor The channels used to trigger are auto set High limit and Low limit values can be enabled and programmed individually for each phase to neutral and phase to phase setting 10 27 10 28 5560 QOS To program individual limit values select the appropriate line that describes the phase to neutral or phase to phase setting that you wish to change If the same limit value will be assigned to more than one phase press Shift click to select multiple phases Enter your limit value for the corresponding phase in the High limit and Low limit fields Click the Limit enabled box to activate Click the Save Setup button every time you assign different limit values PRE AND POST EVENT CAPTURES contain parameters that help users program the number of RMS and waveform cycles to be saved before pre and after post the start and the end of the event These parameters are Pre event start RMS samples Post event start RMS samples Pre event start waveform samples Post event start waveform samples Post event end RMS samples Pre event end waveform samples and Post event end waveform samples The parameters capture RMS sample or RMS waveform cycles that may be use
203. lses Peak Voltage Vpk 200 0 Thresholds Setup provides you with the ability to set limits for triggering of various parameters Values entered are based on the display settings under the Basic tab volts percent or per unit WAVEFORM CHANGES parameters include Voltage waveshape faults voltage variation from previ ous cycle typ 8 Duration duration or window over which to compare against in of cycle typ 10 RMS EVENTS parameters include RMS Events on per phase basis Swell hi limit typically 110 Sag low limit typically 90 IMPULSES parameter consists of Peak Voltage Vpk Impulse in volts peak typ 200 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 11 6 5571 DataNode Setup 5 Advanced tab PS Duration i nd firmware on n nnect L1 o n lonn nnect Li 2 L1 Advanced Setup provides you with the ability to set limits to setup other functions such as UPS time not previously described UPS Duration sec typ 300 Send firmware on next connect check box to enable such from InfoNode to DataNode Showing check sum error check box to enable such in log Send calibration on next connect check box to enable such from DataNode to InfoNode 557 GPS option installed Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide ADAM Handler Setup ADAM Instrument Handler Setup This section applies to the set up of the individual InfoNode ADAM instrument handler
204. ltage THD rinm Voltage TID miim Dn Current THD Rms rr r Short Term Flicker pinio Long Term Flicker rir E S ngPLT O I r Create Meter Panel Reset selections s m Real Time Display Parameters Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS 5560 DataNode System Setup EN50160 General Setup tab The EN50160 General tab requires several setup parameters All Answer Module setups are global to the InfoNode and apply to all instruments that are gathering EN50160 information gt wr Signature System InfoNode Reports Real time Setup Properties fications unications rer tian P General 4 gt Save Setup Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz B ll and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement EN50160 EVALUATION PERIOD properties consist of the Start day Start time and Length of the evaluation period The Start day and Start time properties can be altered and the unit will remain in strict compliance with EN50160 The Length cannot be altered due to the 7 day week period by which the unit calculates information in strict compliance with the EN50160 To program the properties click on the respective value fields to display the drop down menu Start day Specifies the day of the week when the statistics will be reset Day is selected from a drop down menu containing the days of the week The default start day is Sunday Start t
205. luation Indiscriminate selection of parameters should be avoided Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system and not programmable by the user All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in Voltage RMS Variation and Transients limits For example if a frequency is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the frequency goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis then another event is recorded Enabling the parameters for periodic sampling make them appear in the Real time tab Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guid
206. luster of bars one for each phase The color of each bar indicates the compliance status for its phase A green bar indicates that the parameter is within compli ance A red bar indicates that the parameter does not com ply with EN50160 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Supply Voltage Unbalance The unbalance of a three phase supply voltage consists of a loss of symmetry of the phase voltage vectors magnitude and or angle created mainly by unbalanced load Compliance is verified when 95 of the sequence of valid 10 minute values are within the specified tolerance of normally 295 in single phase two phase supplies 396 Supply Voltage Unbalance is represented by a single value and a single bar The color of the bar indicates the compliance status A green bar indicates that the parameter is within compliance A red bar indicates that the parameter does not comply with EN50160 Harmonic Voltage Harmonics display a cluster of bars one for each phase The color of each bar indicates the compliance status that is calculated by anding the status es of Total Harmonic Distortion THD and each Harmonic 2 thru 25 The bars for Harmonic Voltage all link to the same graph See page 10 16 With regard to the Harmonic bars see graph on page 10 6 1 3 bars all go to 10096 but one phase is red this indicates that the THD is in compliance but one or more of the individual harmonic components is not in compliance Clicking o
207. m InfoNode on PC The Signature System InfoNode on PC integrates the power of the InfoNode on your computer The InfoNode which is the central component of the whole Signature System is loaded onto the computer and becomes a service of your Windows operating system The computer acts as a web server for Signature System This computer centric design allows you to manage information through the PC without the need to install and set up separate InfoNode hardware A typical InfoNode on PC setup is built from several DataNodes with the InfoNode program loaded onto the computer DataNodes gather readings from circuits and processes Inexpensive small and easy to install DataNodes have the intelligence to collect data to be PC InfoNode Overview transferred to the InfoNode They communicate their data to the InfoNode on PC through RS 485 or Ethernet links The InfoNode on PC gathers DataNode data converts the data to information manages and presents the information Value added software Answer Modules also available from Dranetz BMI can further enhance program capabilities of InfoNode on PC Depending on the Answer Modules installed data from one or more DataNodes can be analyzed to provide such answers as the direction of the PF cap switching transient upstream or downstream sag directivity location of faults on radial feeders reliability benchmark indices for power quality and different characterizations of data such as QOS
208. m InfoNode on PC User s Guide safety Summary Definitionen WARNUNGEN informieren den Benutzer dar ber da bestimmte Bedingungen oder Vorgehensweisen k rperliche oder t dliche Verletzungen zur Folge haben k nnen VORSICHTSHINWEISE kennzeichnen Bedingungen oder Vorgehensweisen die zu einer Besch digung von Series 5500 seiner Daten oder anderer Ger te bzw von Eigentum f hren k nnen HINWEISE machen auf bestimmte Informationen aufmerksam Symbole Die folgenden Symbole der Internationalen Elektrotechnischen Kommission International Electrotechnical Commission IEC befinden sich auf der Abdeck und Seitenplatte unmittelbar am betreffenden Terminal oder Ger t A Vorsichtshinweis siehe Begleitdokumente dieses Handbuch Wechselstrombetrieb des Terminals bzw Ger ts Gleichstrombetrieb im Terminal 7 7 7 oder Ger t Terminal Schutzleiter vii Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide viii safety Summary Safety Precautions The following safety precautions must be followed when ever any type of connection is being made to the instru ment Connect the green safety earth ground first before making any other connections When connecting to electric circuits or pulse initiating equipment open their related breakers DO NOT install any connection of the instrument on live power lines Connections must be made to the instrument first then connect to the circuit to be monitored
209. m most recent to oldest NOTE If there are a very large number of events in the range selected only the most recent 250 events are listed 3 To step through the events or to jump to the start or end of the list click on the arrow keys in the upper right hand corner of the list Use the horizontal and vertical scroll bars to pan through the Event Listing table Click on the Views Page field descriptor on the top of the table to sort by that par ticular field instead of chronological order 4 If there are Event Details or waveforms associated with those events they can be displayed in additional tabs Double click on the row containing the event of interest This will produce additional tabs showing the event details 5 The event detail viewer supports overlay of multiple channels with left and right axes 6 You can zoom on the waveform by using the left mouse button as was done in the Timeline Graph section 7 Click the right mouse button with the cursor in this display area to produce a similar menu to the Timeline Graph section to allow you to change the properties of the graph as well as save the image 8 Click on the arrow keys in the upper right corner to step through the available waveforms E Timeline View Microsoft Internet Explorer ol n Timeline View Alltime DataNode 141 0357 03 0 257 V Percent 027 General di Print Axis 0 11 5 107312001 tet Copy Image Line Options 12 00 00 Cop
210. mal counter clockwise Normal counter clockwise Reverse clockwise Channel Mapping Phase A voltage Phase A current Phase B voltage Phase B current Phase C voltage Phase C current Neutral voltage Neutral current Signal is connected to Channel 1 Channel is inverted O Transducer Ratios Phase A N VT Phase B N VT Phase C N VT Neutral VT Phase A CT Phase B CT Phase C CT Neutral CT Phase A B VT Phase B C VT Phase C A VT Transducer Primary phase to neutral or phase to phase values displayed depend upon the Wiring Configuration set under the Basic tab Transducer Secondary Magnitude correction Phase correction 1 00000000 0 00000000 DC offset 0 00000000 Transducers are typically PTs potential transformers and CTs current transformers that are used to interface the instrument to the power circuit PTs allow the instrument to measure circuits that are not within the measurement range of the instrument CTs measure the current of the circuit and convert it to within the measurement range of the instrument For Phase rotation users can choose whether to have phasor shift clockwise or counterclockwise depending on the way they have set up their system Click the value field to display the drop down menu featuring Normal counter clockwise or Reverse clockwise Either orientation will yield the same mathematical calculations of voltage and current measurements The 5530
211. ment GR Open Office Document Set Program Access and Defaults w windows Catalog A windows Update Accessories Dranetz BMI Power Suite e Internet 3 E mail ts Games Java Web Start Msoffice Tj wet 48 Infolicde Home Page f start Infonode f sto Infotiede startup Symantec Client Security MB irternet Explorer WE MSN Explorer s gt Remote Assistance L3 Windows Explorer B Windows Journal Viewer mus A Windows Media Player WB Widows Messenger Windows Movie Maker 2 4 Ss Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Preparation for Use Communicating with the InfoNode on PC Working with the InfoNode service is like working with a virtual InfoNode running on your computer Users can communicate with the InfoNode on PC using a web browser NOTE The InfoNode service must be installed and running before you can connect to it via a web browser If you have a large database it may take several minutes for the InfoNode service to respond to web requests When the browser used to access InfoNode is on the same computer where InfoNode software is installed specify localhost see sample screen below as the site address from which to access the InfoNode home page The InfoNode service setup program provides a Start Menu icon to enable you to specify the local host site address setting Enter Network Password 1 3 xl qe Please type your us
212. min 5 Demand Interval mir 15 Demand Sub Interval min 5 Thresholds Instruments thresholds set in Percent complete tab settings other tabs not captured on screen Copyright G 1999 2002 Dranetz BMI and Electrotek Concepts Inc Al rights reserved User Agreement Sample DataNode screen set under Expert mode Basic tab activated Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 3 7 4 Setup Page 3 Data Data setup allows you to specify the number of additional days to keep each data type Keep event data Keep periodic data Keep summary data before purging When the InfoNode becomes full it purges data in a first in first out order This feature allows you to prioritize the order in which data is purged The number of days to keep data values are used to bias the purge time of each type of data respectively In an InfoNode with sufficient storage this results in the lifetime of one type of data being extended by the specified number of days relative to other data types The InfoNode always purges old data when it needs space for new data Consequently the lifetime of data is only extended by the specified number of days when sufficient storage is available The purge time for data is biased and stored when the data 1s saved Changes to the bias values are not applied to previously stored data The Data setup also allows you to remove data stored in the InfoNode Select any on
213. mit plus the hysteresis then another event is recorded Enabling parameters for periodic sampling make them available in the Real time tab 10 31 10 32 5560 QOS 6 Revenue tab Properties Enable Trending This page Basic Revenue Metering Revenue MMTRO M Selectthe journal entry entries to change Phase Eneray A Phase Eneray B Phase Eneray C Total Energy Integrated Reactive Power A Integrated Reactive Power B Integrated Reactive Power C Total Integrated Reactive Power Enable periodic sampling High High limit enabled High High limit High limit enabled High limit Low limit enabled Low limit Low Low limit enabled Low Low limit Deadband enabled Deadband Values Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a check box in the value field opposite Basic Revenue Metering The box enables the trending of values listed in Basic Revenue Metering page If the box is checked the set tings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Each of the individual phase to neutral and three phase total energy and integrated reactive power values found under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE can be enabled Highlight the parameter value you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest
214. mize with your own name and password Any changes made in the setup para meters are not confirmed until the Save Setup button found on the bottom of the page has been clicked Signature System InfoNode e Setup up Properties EJ InfoNode elcome to the Setup Home Page The Setup Home Page is used to view and change the setups of the InfoNode and any DataNodes connected to the InfoNade Only those with Administrative privileges can change the setups though anyone else can view the setups Notifications DataNodes are also added to the InfoNode through this page DataNode setups are dependent on the type of DataNode am Communications H D Battery B rime s onal Settings Radial Fault Location g RBM Kj UPS Verification ataNode Import gt Di Welcome af ili Save Saup Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Setup home page Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page Properties Values User name quest Password MESH eee Description Free access for demos Security level Guest Proficiency level Novice Security Level There are four levels of security provided The security levels can only be assigned by someone with Admin privileges These levels are known as roles and are defined as follows Guest Can only view data Cannot change user prefer ences or system setups Ca
215. n the bars will show harmonic component detail Many instruments used for harmonic measurements of power supply systems express their output with reference to the fundamental component of the voltage especially those indicating the THD Factor 5560 QOS Harmonic values are specified only up to order 25 EN50160 limit for the practical reason that for higher orders the values are generally so small as to be imprac tical to measure Another reason is because of the diffi culty of giving values which would be relevant to all networks Interharmonic Voltage Interharmonics display a cluster of bars one for each phase The color of each bar indi cates the compliance status that is calculated by adding the statuses of Total Interharmonic Distortion TID and each Interharmonic 2 thru 25 The bars for Interharmonic Voltage all link to the same graph See page 10 16 Mains Signalling With regard to signal transmission over the public supply network it is necessary to distin guish between ripple control systems frequency range from 100 Hz to 3 kHz and mains communication systems frequency range 3 kHz to 148 5 kHz Mains Signalling display a cluster of bars one for each phase The color of each bar indicates the compliance status that is calculated by adding the statuses of each of the defined frequencies a maximum of five for its phase A green bar indicates that the parameter is within compliance A red bar indicates that the pa
216. n uere bomo Heise endet Deli 6 1 WHE e neonates 6 1 Meter DIEI ERR ens tet sees 6 1 Meter Panel nueces Ino Seis ia onc RE deut iei d Sia 6 3 SCOPE ModE iae sentio de tet d eget gite tone ed A ote adt 6 3 Help uocoaodburuereiinD LLLI EE IET E 6 4 Real time TOpiesscissici ste ieetite ect dese s ese tet bee wate eruere et ev Ene EE 6 4 Index iussisti aim omni E 6 4 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Contents 7 Setup Page Setup PaBeuisod uci ated euet en a A A OA 7 1 non c E pna E a E A E E RE ES 7 1 IU SIE T A E E ET 7 1 Security Level Guess Viewer Operator Administrator ssss 7 2 Proficiency Level Novice or Expert 7 3 I Dr E EE AAE epar Hs aro E MITIS 7 4 Nri 7 4 GG H 7 4 Notifications iunio RUE RET HR ERU OPE HELENA Fede 7 5 RECIPIENS toto neo ett ed Mads e ORE ett deeds 7 5 Sebdets cesi oiii nime Ure DERE Pies 7 7 DyatamO des es pror ERU HRRORN HIDE DNE HEIN atis 7 7 CORDDEeCUQD peer ener eee eee re Repent ee creer re rere ree eet reer er rt UE 7 8 pon A ell eat cleats 7 9 Hunni M 7 11 Sh tdowhn n euteui tte EU E EU ORE ER PE CEPI DE RE EUER 7 11 ASID iP M RE ceca A T N E A 7 11 ComniuticatiOns icon reni en Hee den tere e Res 7 12 ADAM eae E IE LM NI EE 7 12 WTI C
217. nables the trending of values listed in Harmonics page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Under SELECT JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE various harmonic parameters can be trended using periodic readings that are stored in a journal Harmonic distortion of voltage or current is calculated through a Fourier transformation of the waveform into harmonic magnitudes and phase angle spectra These spectra are used to determine figures of merit such as total harmonic distortion THD and telephone influence factor TIF The total interharmonic distortion TID is calculated similar to the THD See Appendix A Quantities Calculated from Periodic Voltage and Current Measurements The InfoNode DataNode system allows simultaneous measurements of voltage and current so that harmonic power flow can be obtained Depending on value parameters set the program can record a sampling of the waveform synchronized to the fundamental frequency to Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide ensure accurate calculation of harmonic phase angles The sampling rate is sufficient to determine up to the 50th harmonic and interharmonic or better A comprehensive range of high and low limits can be enabled and individually set for each measured parameter Highlight the value parameter you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Che
218. naccuracy error or delay in or omission of a any Information or b the transmission or delivery of Information 2 any loss or damage arising from or occasioned by a any such inaccuracy error delay or omission b non performance c interruption of Information due either to any negligent act or omission by Dranetz BMI or providers transmitters of Information or to any force majeure i e flood extraordinary weather conditions earthquake or other act of God fire war insurrection riot labor dispute accident action of govemment communications power failure or equipment or software malfunction or any other cause beyond the reasonable xl Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you choose No the setup will close To install Signature System InfoNode you must accept this agreement InstallShield ae 7e we _ Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Preparation for Use Signature System InfoNode Setup continued 3 Setup prompts you to select the destination folder where the InfoNode program will be installed To use the default destination folder click Next and proceed to Step 4 Default settings typically work well in most situations To change the destination folder location click Browse then select the directory path where InfoNode will be installed When changing the destination location where software will be installed consider the availability of disk spa
219. nal define a una persona calificada como una que est familiarizada con la construcci n y operaci n del equipo y con los riesgos involucrados AVERTISSEMENT Si l instrument est mal connect la mort des blessures graves ou un danger d incendie peuvent s en suiv re Lisez attentivement ce manuel avant de connecter l instrument Lorsque vous utilisez l instrument suivez toutes les instructions d installation et de service Cet instrument doit tre connect conform ment au National Electrical Code ANSI AFPA 70 2002 des Etats Unis et toutes les exigences de s curit applicables votre installation Cet instrument doit tre install utilis et entretenu uniquement par un personnel qualifi Selon le National Electrical Code une personne est qualifi e si elle connait bien la construction et l utilisation de l quipement ainsi que les dangers que cela implique WARNUNG Der falsche Anschluss dieses Ger tes kann Tod schwere Verletzungen oder Feuer verursachen Bevor Sie dieses Instrument anschliessen m ssen Sie die Anleitung lesen und verstanden haben Bei der Verwendung dieses Instruments m ssen alle Installation und Betriebsanweisungen beachtet werden Der Anschluss dieses Instruments muss in bereinstimmung mit den nationalen Bestimmungen f r Elektrizit t ANSI NFPA 70 2002 der Vereinigten Staaten sowie allen weiteren in Ihrem Fall anwend baren Sicherheitsbestimmungen vorgenommen werden Installation
220. nd goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis then the event is recorded Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 8 Advanced Energy tab 5560 QOS Enable Trending This page Advanced Energy Adv Energy MFLOO Ira Select the journal entry entries to change Forward tot fund freq VarHrs Reverse tot fund freq VarHrs Fundamental freq VA hours A Fundamental freq VA hours B Fundamental freq VA hours C Total fundamental freq VA hours nable periodic sampling igh High limit enabled igh High limit igh limit enabled igh limit ow limit enabled ow limit ow Low limit enabled ow Low limit Deadband enabled eadband am e o e e o e Journal entries in the Advanced Energy tab show various energy parameters on per phase and total basis as well as in forward and reverse mode Fundamental frequency is used as the reference unit Frequency is specified in hertz Fundamental frequency refers to the principal component of a wave i e the component with the lowest frequency or greatest amplitude Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a checkbox in the value field opposite Advanced Energy The box enables the trending of values listed in Advanced Energy Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide page If the box 1s checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the
221. nd installed on the InfoNode The minimum required InfoNode firmware version for the Graphical Interface Display one line AnswerModule is V3 2 3 Basic Characterizer Enables automatic detection of voltage sags which are often the most common type of power disturbance Once detected the Answer Module characterizes the sag This Answer Module is the general and or basic characterizer of the data It characterizes RMS events as sags swells or interruptions This Answer Module characterizes data based upon categories The default settings of the categories are based on IEEE 1159 guide for characterizing power quality events and these default settings can be seen in the figure next page The number in the magnitude column represents the range of values starting from that number up to but not including the number in the cell above it For RMS Variations the categories do not necessarily represent a continuum they are simply numbers that represent non overlapping rectangles in mag dur space The categories generally represent increased risk of equipment malfunc tion Note that Category 8 swells only stops at 125 for display purposes and in reality represents any swell greater than 105 For Transient Variations the categories represent a continuum of peak transient over voltage Note that Category 7 only stops at 205 for display purposes and in reality represents any transient with a peak magnitude greater than 190 f RMS Categories Tra
222. ndicates Health status whether the DataNode system is functioning normally or not Both information are set by default and cannot be altered by users Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 2 Basic tab Properties Communications DataNode Address Password Power System Low Voltage Voltage Medium Voltage 1 00000000 1 00000000 Declared Voltage 230 o Voltage Class Wirina confiauration Compliance Setup Freauencies to Trend 198 69 18 202 L ale d 4 ale d Synchronized to Grid Be er fStrict Custom Mains Sianallina None 5560 QOS display drop down menu The Basic tab contains value settings for the following Communications Power System and Mains Signalling For a 5560 DataNode the Basic page highlights those fields necessary for the DataNode to properly acquire data COMMUNICATIONS is where the IP information for the specific DataNode is entered Each 5560 QOS is shipped from the factory with an IP Address This IP address is entered under the DataNode Address field Password is the password for InfoNode to DataNode communications The password is typically left at factory default NOTE The password must match that of the DataNode Under POWER SYSTEM users can configure Voltage Class by clicking on the value field A drop down menu with two entries Low Voltage LV and Medium Voltage MV appears LV is defined as lt 1kV nominal MV is 1kV to 35kV nominal
223. nnot change the configuration of the instrument in any way Viewer Can view data and access basic setup features Can change only basic user preferences e g plot title text size color background color etc You can open user pref erences dialog box by right clicking on the event image and selecting properties Home Views Signature System InfoNode Reports Realtime f Seup Setup InfoNode e Users 6 admin E guest user B Data E Storage 6 Log Eam Notifications am Communications 19 Battery E Time E Regional Settings Gf AnswerModule Basic Characterizer E kvar change observer Radial Fault Location RBM UPS Verification DataNodes 5530 5520 DataNode 540 DataNode 571 DataNode m ADAM DataNode m GEKV DataNode MetOne DataNode 4 Df Generar _ a Sample display window screen for a user named guest By selecting an item on the Properties column a cursor or choices will appear on the right column space Enter your desired Values Certain property items can be accessed only by those with admin privileges Read next sections on Security Level and Proficiency Level Operator Can view data change user preferences and change select DataNode and InfoNode setups Cannot add users or change security levels Administrator Can access basic setup security account management and network configuration parameters Can access all features of the InfoNode including factory se
224. nsient Categories E E 10 20 20 30 30 60 30 60 PoC ycles CC Seconds Minutes Norrnal poeni mer Eum i IEEE EE E mp fis aa a Definition of RMS amp Transient Disturbance Categories The user may modify the categories The setup for this Answer Module allows the user to define the criteria for RMS and Transient Disturbance Categories Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page RMS Disturbance Categories The user may define up to nine RMS disturbance categories using the threshold property settings found in the setup screen Click on a desired category then set the corresponding threshold property limit see definitions of the threshold properties below Assign different threshold settings for each category Once the threshold limits are crossed and the Category Enabled box checked the RMS disturbance category will be classified as an event These pre defined RMS disturbance event categories are then reported as signal notifications to recipients see page 7 9 For example in the RMS Disturbance Categories setup screen below Category was selected Limit values for Category 1 were defined in the respective threshold property fields The Category Enabled box has been checked to activate Category 1 as an event when threshold limits have been crossed System InfoNode Setup Signature RMS Disturbance Categories Category 2 Category 3 Category 4 Category 5 Categ
225. nsient recording capabilities for all transient events using waveshape instantaneous peak and dual positive and negative high frequency peak detectors Impulsive transients are characterized by a very rapid change in the magnitude of the measured quantity Because these types of disturbances exhibit high frequencies they are quickly damped by the system They tend to be unidirectional when close to their source Impulses are commonly caused by capacitors or inductors switching on line loose wires lightning static and power failures Oscillatory transients are defined as a temporary rapid discontinuity of the waveform Frequency is the most important characteristic in identifying this type of transient event Frequencies are further classified into high 500 kHz or greater medium 5 to 500 kHz or low 5 kHz or less Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Transient events in the form of wave faults are captured using the waveform change detection technique This is done by recording present cycle samples and comparing it to samples from the previous cycle Waveshape trigger values include the magnitude and duration of the difference between the present and previous cycle Transients can be captured using the high frequency positive negative peak detectors crest factor peak instantaneous and or the waveshape variation triggering functions The high frequency detected transient uses special circuitry to detect and captu
226. nt THD Fund Normalized B Current THD Fund Normalized C Current THD Fund Normalized N Current THD RMS Normalized A Current THD RMS Normalized B Total Phase Harmonic Power A N Total Phase Harmonic Power B N Total Phase Harmonic Power C N Signed Phase Harmonic Power A N Signed Phase Harmonic Power B N Signed Phase Harmonic Power C N Harmonics screen display continued next page Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 10 39 10 40 5560 QOS continued Enable periodic sampling High High limit enabled High High limit Low limit enabled Low limit Low Low limit enabled Low Low limit Deadband enabled Deadband Harmonics are waveform distortion a steady state deviation from an ideal power frequency sinusoid and is characterized by the spectral content of the waveform Many non linear devices such as battery chargers switching power supplies or transformers inject currents at harmonic integer multiples of the fundamental frequencies into the system Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a check box in the value field opposite Harmonics The box enables the trending of values listed in Harmonics page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Under SELECT JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE various harmonic parameters can be trended using periodic readings that ar
227. nted out Smart Views selections include 3D page 10 4 Timeline Smart Views and Help options RMS Mag Dur Magnitude and Duration RMS Mag Dur Clicking on any Timeline or Smart View option will Smart Trends Event Summary RMS Variations direct you to a common Query Section screen The Snapshots Transients Displays QOS Status query Screen see page 10 4 Views Page orem Signature System InfoNode Real time QOS Status View Display Display in New Window DataNodes All DataNodes DataNodel Edison Service Entrance 5560B4 C Range Today x From 07 21 2002 00 00 00 to 07 24 2002 08 26 05 Any range selected that is less than the current QOS interval length will display the current QOS interval Refresh this page to update the selection control contents and select default values Select the DataNodes of interest Hold down the Control key to select multiple DataNodes By default All DataNodes are selected Select date time range of interest Click on the Display or the Display in New Window button to initiate the query The results will appear either in this window or a new window depending on the button you click Signature System InfoNode click to display f Vews Reports Real time Setup Timeline View in 3D RMS Mag Dur RMS Mag Dur Smart Trends Event Summary R riations Snap Transients zT Help E views Topics JE index Timeline View existing window
228. o save the most recent changes in settings or not Signature System InfoNode Reports Re f Setup Technical Products Specialist 4 V s General A ADAM 4060 gt E Mail A Pager Save Setup Copyright amp 1999 2003 Dranetz BM and Glectrotek Concepts Inc Al rights reserved User Agreement Recipient Name General properties setup Click on the ADAM 4060 tab The Enable ADAM 4060 Notifications box must be checked for communication signals to ADAM modules to occur The ADAM 4060 relay contact closure module is used to signal notifications to designated recipients See page 12 3 for instructions on how to set up the ADAM 4060 contact closure module Data for the ADAM modules may be configured in various format one of which is the hexadecimal format displayed opposite the Output Value property This format is selected by setting bits 0 and 1 of the data format ASCII s condensed hexadecimal repre sentation of data allows high resolution quick communication and easy conversion to computer compatible integer for mat See page 7 12 for more information on ADAM Communication modules ESE wr Signature System InfoNode Reports R Properties 0010 02 hex 0001 01 hex 0010 02 hex 0011 03 hex 0100 04 hex 4 Df General nba 4060 E Mail Pager amet Save Setup EL fs as Copyright 1999 2003 Liranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc Al r
229. oaded to the InfoNode The standard home page can be modified or replaced with a custom HTML page at extra cost Please contact the Dranetz BMI Customer Service Department Phone 732 287 3680 or 1 800 DRANTEC Web http www dranetz bmi com 3 InfoNode Status The InfoNode Status table provides general information about the InfoNode and the data that it retrieved from the connected DataNodes including the following DataNode Information DataNode health status is based on continual checks of the communication links and internal processes Database usage shows the amount 96 of memory used As a reference the total available memory is shown of Disturbances Total disturbances First disturbance Last disturbance is defined by the type of DataNode connected For a power quality type DataNode these include events triggered by limit or threshold crossings of Disturbances Since your last logon In the last 48 hours is the amount of events that have occurred since the user last logged on and in the last 48 hours Disturbances 1s linked to the Event SummaryView DataNode Status You can select the DataNode Status from either the linked text on the Home Page or by selecting the Setup tab and clicking on the desired DataNode site in the tree directory This page provides information about specific DataNodes connected to the InfoNode This includes DataNode Description the Last Connection made DataNode site Health status
230. ode Summary The DataNode Summary Smart Report is a listing of information about a selected DataNode over the specified time period This report includes RMS Variation Summary Transient Summary Monitor Status DataNode Log and the DataNode Setup 2 QOS Compliance The QOS Compliance Smart Report will generate tables and graphs reflecting the compliance of the categories specified in EN50160 for the intervals that were recorded by the DataNodes you selected The following reports are presented Compliance Summary Compliance Graph Event Statistics Harmonics Graph Interharmonics Graph Power Frequency Graph and Min Max Tables See page 10 11 2 Voltage Quality The Voltage Quality Smart Report consists of a series of timeplots of available voltage phases along with event summaries histograms of event magnitudes a Mag Dur curve and a 3D Mag Dur curve Energy and Demand The Energy and Demand Smart Report consists of trends tables and histograms for demand and energy parameters 3 Event Summary The Event Summary Smart Report consists of a table of events that occurred within the date time that were selected for the query This report allows for the selection of multiple DataNodes Events are displayed in chronological order with the most recent event appearing first s Top 10 Events The Top 10 Events Smart Report is similar to the Event Summary Smart Report except that it groups the events by type sags swell in
231. of the reactive power of the circuit into which the instrument is connected Var is the unit for reactive power Kilovolt ampere kV A is equivalent to 1000 volt amperes VA is the unit for apparent power Apparent power is the product of voltage and current of a single phase circuit in Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup which the two reach their peaks at different times See Appendix E Glossary for the definitions of the various power parameter values The accumulated energy values include real power factor average three phase which is mathematically defined as demand kW demand kVA It also displays integrated and total integrated reactive power The system also calculates and stores apparent energy VA Real Power W and Apparent Power VA are reset together you cannot reset one without resetting the other Likewise the Watthour Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Meter and Varhour Meter are reset together The system uses the fundamental frequency as reference for calculating energy values in one of two modes forward or reverse In forward mode the circuit monitor considers the direction of power flow allowing the accumulated energy magnitude to both increase and decrease In reverse mode the circuit monitor accumulates energy as positive regardless of the direction of power flow In other words the energy value increases even during reverse power flow The default accum
232. olation to protect your equipment Power Supply ADAM Module operation is guaranteed when using any power supply between 10 and 30 VDC All power supply specifications are referenced at module connector When modules are powered remotely the effects of line voltage drops must be considered All modules use on board switching regulators to sustain good efficiency over the 10 and 30 V input range therefore we can assume that the actual current draw is inversely proportional to the line voltage Select power cables according to the number of modules connected and the length of the power lines iy S E Nu NX SA Inpa n s RSE3P 4 8 7 1 Input 6 55 E 4 Gat L a n InFoNode O89 Male E 1 RSeBe RS485 Converter J U p 5 M 1V V MV V M X 4000 Series Adam Module 400 Series Adan Module 12 VIC gt gt Bno X gt r 4 Generic Connections for the 4000 Series ADAM Module 12 1 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide ADAM Handler Setup ADAM Utility Software A menu driven program is provided for ADAM Module configuration monitoring and calibra tion Dranetz BMI ships ADAM Modules with the necessary Windows driver and the Utility software disk ADAM Repeater When communication lines exceed 4 000 ft 1200 meter or the number of ADAM modules connected is more than 32 a repeater should be connected to expand the first se
233. ommunications lOBaseT Ethernet to InfoNode InfoNode access through Internet Intranet dial up or wireless telephone line Additional Features Remote firmware update automatic report writer software option Certifications and design standards CE ISO9001 EMC Directive 89 366 EEC IEC 61000 4 7 IEC 61000 4 15 EN61010 1 1993 EN61010 1 A2 NOTE The 5560 DataNode is actually a 5520 5530 EPQ DataNode with different firmware EPQ DataNodes can be upgraded to 5560 Please contact Dranetz BMI factory for details Measurements Power Frequency Mean value based on time between Zero crossings of voltage of Phase A calculated over 10 second window Magnitude of the supply voltage RMS calculated over 1 cycle with 4 cycle steps Supply voltage variations Ten minute mean of RMS calculated over 1 cycle with cycle steps Rapid voltage changes Flicker As per EN61000 4 15 Supply voltage dips 1 to 90 of Un Depth of RMS calculated over 1 cycle with cycle steps along with 10msec to 60 seconds in duration reported in tabular form Short interruptions of the supply voltage lt 1 of Un on cycle RMS with duration less or equal to 3 min RMS calculated over 1 cycle with 1 2 cycle steps Temporary power Frequency overvoltage between live conductors and earth 110 of Un or Uc RMS calculated over 1 cycle with cycle steps Transient overvoltages between live conductors and earth Captured at 128 sampl
234. on of the Signature System DataNode Otherwise access to information may be denied The User Account Password and Admin Account Password refer to two different user categories An Admin User can create and add an account for a new Basic User Both Admin and Basic users can assign properties such as their own user name and password See page 7 1 User section for more details The default InfoNode Access User ID is admin The default InfoNode Access Password is password These parameters allow access to view and change information in the InfoNode system The default Firmware Access User ID is admin The default Firmware Access Password is password These parameters allow access to view and change information in the DataNode system To change passwords simply click on the Password value fields A confirmation window appears everytime you click on the password value field The window asks whether you want to change and save a new password Parameters are also available for ONE TIME OPERATIONS on the EPQ DataNode These one time procedures include configuring the DataNode to its default settings and or clearing memory space by rebooting Observe caution in undertaking these procedures since they cannot be undone To return to the default DataNode Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide settings activate the Reset 302 default setup value field To clear old data and reboot DataNode activate the Clear 332 Database and
235. onfirmation win dow appears after encoding new value settings and just before you switch to a different tab or exit setups 11 Checkboxes may be found under the Values column of select properties in various tabs A checked box means that the parameter it represents is activated enabled An unchecked box means that the parameter is not activated disabled 12 The Active property is found under the General tab in all DataNode types Click on its corresponding checkbox in the value field The InfoNode does not start communi cations with the DataNode until the Active box is checked It is recommended that all changes and settings are made prior to activating the DataNode 13 Remember that the InfoNode acts as a complete gateway for the various data captured and stored in the DataNode The InfoNode Setup tab is where users configure properties and values for specific DataNode sites Users can view the resulting data using the Views tab Real time tab and Reports tab 14 Help is available from any page though it is tab sensitive not context sensitive On screen help is available for various topics under the Help Desk folder The Help Desk can be accessed through hyperlinks to jump to a selected topic or by using the index 15 Further assistance can be obtained by contacting Dranetz BMI Technical Support staff at 1 800 372 6832 Below is a sample display screen showing the Save Setup button the confirmation window for saving change
236. onitoring the UPS input from the list of available DataNodes Selecting Not Set deactivates this pair for the Answer Module UPS Output DataNode Select the DataNode monitoring the UPS output from the list of available DataNodes Selecting Not Set deactivates this pair for the Answer Module Delta sec for time synchronization The delta between the input event time and the output event time allowed for it to be considered the same event If the DataNodes are time synched together this should be set to 1 7 27 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 28 Setup Page 7 DataNodes DataNodes being the frontline data acquisition compo nent of the Signature System are available in various models and configurations The setup of a DataNode is dependent on the DataNode type Click on DataNodes in the left frame to view the different DataNode types that the InfoNode currently supports The current list of DataNodes supported by InfoNode appears below The PC InfoNode can handle up to 32 DataNodes with full parameter monitoring of about 200 parameters for each DataNode The PC InfoNode can also handle up to 50 DataNodes with reduced parameter monitoring of about 100 parameters for each DataNode LF 5530 5520 DataNode The 5530 5520 belong to the Enhanced Power Quality EPQ family of DataNodes EPQ DataNode is available in three model types Model 5530 Model 5520 and Model 5510 They are designed to do comprehensive and PQ o
237. only server only WPT Private port 38642 WPT Private ports 38643 and EPQ DataNodes UCA GOMSFE 0 9 over MMS P High Level Non Internet Protocols and Formats primary InfoNode to DataNode COMTRADE event capture format converted to PQDIF in InfoNode InfoNode Internet Communication Protocols Ports HTTP port 80 nomal web requests replies file transfers XML FTP ports 20 and 21 fimware update ISO TCP port 102 RFC 1006 1SO protocol over TCP IP SNTP port 123 time synchronization discovery protocol EE 38644 create only server only client server for MMS protocol client and server SYSLOG debug logging client and server port 25 emailprotoco i d InfoNode High Level NonInternet Protocols and Formats dependent on installed handlers UCA GOMSFE 0 9 primary InfoNode to DataNode overMMS TCP communication protocol COMTRADE event capture format converted to PQDIF in InfoNode read only IEEE 1159 3 PQDIF primary data storage and exchange format XML used for HTTP based information transfer between InfoNode and client software Advantech ADAM RS232 amp RS485 ModBUS RS232 amp RS485 MetOne RS232 serial protocol serial protocol proprietary protocol for meteorological stations DBMI 7100 roprietary serial protocol RS232 amp RS485 ANSI C18 12 RS232 amp RS485 TAP pagermodem protocol Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide master only master onl master only master onl
238. operties Limits A N Voltage Bank selection enables programming limits below B N Voltage C N Voltage N G Voltage A B Voltage B C Voltage C A Voltage A Current B Current C Current N Current Limit enabled High limit Low limit Pre event start RMS samples cycles Post event start RMS samples cycles Pre event start waveform samples cycles Post event start waveform samples cycles Post event end RMS samples cycles Pre event end waveform samples cycles Post event end waveform samples cycles Cycles in range to end event Number of Rates to Use 5560 QOS Values phase to neutral or phase to phase values displayed here depend upon the Wiring Configuration set under the Basic tab Pre and Post Event Captures RMS Variations Sampling Intervals Intervals Reduced sampling rate 1 Reduced sampling rate 2 Reduced sampling rate 3 Sample min max avg every N cycles le Number of seconds to use this rate 6 000000000 RMS stands for root mean square a mathematical formula used to measure the average voltage and current Voltage and current changes are measured and checked against their programmed limits Thresholds are set in ranges with high limit threshold above the programmed limit and low limit threshold below the programmed limit RMS Variations result whenever voltage or current RMS value rises above or fall below the programmed thresholds Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide The fol
239. or all three phases can be trended and limits set The positive negative and zero sequence com ponents for voltage and current can be trended Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a check box in the value field opposite Imbalance The box enables the trending of values listed in Imbalance page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are per sisted but are not in effect Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE highlight the parameter value you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Threshold enable refers to the checkboxes opposite the limits Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son that is higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event 1s recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the e
240. or electrical equipment Its sole function is to give values for the main voltage characteristics of electricity supplied by Low Voltage LV and Medium Voltage MV public networks That means EN50160 is a product standard giving the voltage characteristics which can be expected at the supply terminals This standard does not describe the average situation in the public supply networks but the maximum values or variations of the voltage characteris tics under normal operating conditions which can be expected by the customer at any place of the network Based on Draft Guide to the Application EN50160 CENELEC Report CLC BTTF 68 6 SG 1 Rev January 1999 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS 5560 DataNode QOS Functional Components The QOS compliance monitoring functionality of the 5560 DataNode is optimized to ensure error free setup and reporting for EN50160 applications Selections are provided to allow a user to configure the system to col lect either a super set or sub set of the measurements required for EN50160 monitoring Statistical data is cal culated on the required 12 parameters specified in EN50160 over the 1 week interval to produce a PASS FAIL decision of compliance Statistical and trending visualizations show what the values of each of the parameters were over the interval and at what time did they approach or exceed limits As with other Dranetz BMI DataNodes the 5560 DataNode is set up and view
241. or the specific DataNode is entered Each 5530 5520 DataNode is shipped from the factory with an IP Address This IP Address is entered here Password is the password for Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide InfoNode to DataNode communications The password is typically left at factory default NOTE The password entered must match that of the DataNode Under POWER SYSTEM users can set values for PT Primary PT Secondary and Base Voltage Vrms PT Primary and PT Secondary allow the setting of the primary and secondary components respectively of all transducer ratios Ratios for all three phases are set when this field is changed and saved If the values for the individual phases are different the phase A setting is displayed No setup values are changed unless the user modifies this field and saves the changes The values being modified here are the same as the individual values on the Transducers page see page 8 22 For a 5530 5520 the default value of both PT Primary and PT Secondary is 1 Users can also input values for the Base voltage Vrms This field is where the user specifies the nominal line voltage The value serves as the basis for computing High and Low limits under the RMS Variations tab when percent of nominal or per unit options are used Users can also select the Wiring configuration of the circuit Simply click on the value field and a drop down menu lists Single Phase Wye Delta and Split Single Phase
242. ore information on the Communications ADAM 4060 properties tab sw Signature System InfoNode Real Properties Values EJ Hex Address of 4060 00 Contact Logic Normally Open Positive Contact Pulse Time Seconds 1 ings terizer gt Df Port Setup DAE 0601 Copyright 1999 2004 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement 6 The relay 1 4 HEX address is different It 1s chosen from the drop down box in the recipient section For example Relay 1 is 0001 and is HEX 01 Relay 4 is 1000 and is HEX 8 Go to Setup Page Notifications gt Recipients gt ADAM 4060 tab See page 7 6 for more information on the Recipient ADAM 4060 notification setup screen mmz Signature System InfoNode Reports Real time Setup 0011 03 hex 0100 04 hex Communicati Batt Time Df General anan 4060 E Mail Pager Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Blectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement NOTE It takes approximately 4 seconds for a test transmission to close the relay and around 3 5 minutes for a rms sag to be alarmed 12 4 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide ADAM Handler Setup Signature System supports a wide variety of ADAM modules to fit any applications See page 12 6 for the list of avail able modules supported by the Signature S
243. ory 6 Category 7 Category Enabled Minimum Magnitude 7z Maximum Magnitude zz Minimum Time seconds Maximum Time seconds 100000 0000 Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Setup screen for RMS Disturbance Categories For the selected category the following fields need to be defined Care should be taken so that categories do not overlap or that dead areas are created Category Enabled For this to be a disturbance category it must be enabled Check the box to activate or clear the box to deactivate Minimum Magnitude The minimum magnitude is defined as a percent of normal that defines this category Maximum Magnitude The maximum magnitude is defined as percent of normal that defines this category Minimum Time The minimum duration is the minimum amount of time that the magnitude must be sustained Maximum Time The maximum duration is the maximum amount of time that the magnitude can be sustained Category Name The category name describes the defined category and will appear in the characteristics field in Event Summaries and Notifications 7 19 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 20 Setup Page Transient Disturbance Categories The user may define up to nine Transient disturbance categories using the threshold property settings found in the setup screen Click on a de
244. otal basis as well as in forward and reverse mode Fundamental frequency is used as the reference unit Frequency is specified in hertz Fundamental frequency refers to the principal component of a wave i e the component with the lowest frequency or greatest amplitude Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a checkbox in the value field opposite Advanced Energy The box enables the trending of values listed in Advanced Energy page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE highlight the phase value parameter you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the high limit Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High
245. ower kva Phase C Apparent Power kva Total Apparent Power kva ELI ET ELE Basic tab screen display continued next page Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 9 3 0 5540 DataNode Setup continued Phase A Power Factor PU Phase B Power Factor PU Phase B Power Factor PU Total Power Factor PU Frequency Hz Total Positive Energy Flow kWh Total Negative Energy Flow kWh Total Positive Integrated Reactive Power Flow kvarh Total Negative Integrated Reactive Power Flow kvarh Total Integrated Apparent Power Flow kvah kVA Dermand Basic Setup contains data on Communications Display Inputs and Registers COMMUNICATIONS parameters include the following Address must be a unique address between 1 and 32 for each DataNode Polling Interval sec typically 300 seconds Serial Port either COMI or COM2 of the InfoNode Baud Rate typically 9600 baud Parity a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers where an extra bit called parity bit is added to a number if Even parity is used the sum of all 1 s in the number and its corresponding parity bit is alway seven if None odd parity is used the sum of the 1 s and the pari ty bit is always odd Protocol mechanism for information exchange between InfoNode and DataNode either MODBUS or ASCII DISPLAY parameters include the following Display Thresholds as displays parameters in either Volts Percent or PU per un
246. pecifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit 13 Advanced Harmonics tab Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place Note that these limits are the absolute or actual values to trigger on not a percent of fixed or floating base as can be used in Voltage RMS Variation and Transients limits Properties Values Enable Trending This page Advanced Harmonics Individual MHAIO Ira Trend harmonics for phase A i Trend harmonics for phase B M Trend harmonics for phase C Ira Harmonics to Trend Phase Voltages 2 25 sample harmonic values to trend Neutral Voltages Phase Currents Neutral Current Interharmonics to Trend Phase Voltages 2 25 Neutral Voltages Phase Currents Neutral Current The following parameters are found under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE Advanced harmonics Individual and Trend harmonics for phases A B and C Opposite these parameters are checkboxes which enable the trending of
247. ply Voltage 10Min SS S2 81 Valid Intervals lt 2 YES NO YES NO Unbalance Power Frequency 10 Min SS Count Reports DataNode Calculation NO NO NO YES Pass in all intervals within broad limit and 95 of intervals with narrow limits Rapid Voltage 2 Hours SSPIt 2 Hour Plt lt 1 0 Y Y YES WES Changes Flicker Rapid Voltage RMS Variations 90 to 95 LV 94 NO YES Changes Step to 96 MV Changes ISS Harmonic Group THD lt 8 Table for Individual Harmonics YES YES Interharmonic SS Interharmonic TID lt 1 All components lt 0 5 vg ES ES ES YES YES Voltage Group TID and components 2 to 25 Mains Signaling ISS Count Reports Frequencies intervals Notes Power Frequency sampling done in DataNode at 10 second intervals reported to journal every 10 minutes Mains Signalling sampling done in DataNode at 3 second intervals reported to journal every 10 minutes ES NO NO NO NO N DataNode Calculation N Pass if in range 99 of O O NO YES Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS 5560 DataNode Setup General Information DataNodes have a wide variety of user programmable fea tures that can be set under the DataNode Setup tab of the InfoNode Select the appropriate folder under the DataNode setup tree then select the DataNode type that you wish to program DataNode Properties and Values will be displayed on the right frame Use the tabs
248. pparent power Power Factor true PF Watts divided by Volt amperes on per phase basis except delta and total values Power Factor Displacement The ratio of the power of the fundamental wave in watts to the apparent power on the fundamental wave in volt amperes Power Quality The concept of powering and grounding sensitive elec tronic equipment in a manner that is suitable to the oper ation of that equipment Primary The input winding of a transformer Reactive Phase Power Volt ampere reactive power for individual phases Residual Current Vector sum of phase currents not including neutral RMS Root Mean Square The square root of the arithmetic mean of the squares of a set of electrical amplitudes RMS Sag Low RMS voltage or current excursions below some pro grammed threshold Motor starts and faults on the utility system are two common causes of sags Sags can cause loads to turn off and reset circuits to operate unexpected ly RMS Swell High RMS voltage or current excursions above the pro grammed threshold Swells can be caused by voltage reg ulation problems removing loads from the system or adding loads with stored energy Swells can damage equipment or disrupt electronic loads RMS Variation RMS voltage excursions exceeding some programmed threshold See RMS sag and or RMS swell A change in square root of the sum of samples squared divided by number of samples 128 that crosses limit
249. pt to initially configure the InfoNode upload new firmware or run extensive diagnostic tests on the system 1 3 PC InfoNode Overview This page intentionally left blank Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Preparation for Use PC InfoNode Software Package Contents One CD ROM containing the Signature System InfoNode Setup program and Tardis 2000 Time Server program in order to use the Signature System NTP Time service the Tardis program must be installed PC InfoNode User s Guide System Requirements Operating System MS Windows 2000 or MS Windows XP Processor Pentium III or higher Memory 128 MB or more Disk Requirements 20 MB hard disk space for installation 40 GB hard drive Monitor VGA or better Hi color 1024 x768 or higher recommended NOTE 1 The InfoNode software runs as a service on a Windows 2000 or Windows XP computer Services are special programs that run in the background without any visible windows Services can be set to automatically start when the computer starts even if no one logs onto the computer NOTE 2 The InfoNode service turns the computer into a web server supporting HTTP FTP SYSLOG NTP and Telnet services For this reason make sure no other programs or services are running that use these protocols Specifically the computer must not be running web server software MS IIS MS Personal Web Server or Apache If the computer is connected to the Internet these protocols can be a
250. ptimized acquisition of power quality related distur bances and events The salient features of EPQ Datanode include voltage and current trigger and capture mecha nisms increased system performance allowing users to identify data of interest and to record only that data cross triggering feature that permits linking of many DataNodes and TCP IP Ethernet communications Z 5540 DataNode The 5540 is known as the Energy Management EM DataNode It is designed to help users manage their ener gy consumption The 5540 is equipped with a 3 line LED display for viewing all measured parameters without the use of a computer Among the more important parameters it can measure are true RMS voltage and current kW kVA power factor frequency kWh and kVAR Energy data from the 5540 EM DataNode can be viewed in real time by multiple users using Signature System InfoNode via a standard web browser d 5560 DataNode The 5560 also known as Quality of Supply QOS DataNode is designed to monitor quality of supply compliance as specified by European Standard EN50160 It can be set in Strict compliance with EN50160 or can be customized using Custom setups Under Strict compliance only the General and Basic tabs are visible and modifiable This is the standard method in using the 5560 For those who have unique applications requiring modification of the standard setups the Compliance Setup selection box on the Basic tab can be changed to Custom
251. quivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the 11 Harmonics tab 5560 QOS system All limit values are used to determine if corre sponding reporting or logging action should take place For example if the Positive Sequence Voltage is detect ed to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the Positive Sequence Voltage goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis then the event is recorded Enable Trending This page Harmonics Harmonics MHAO z 1 1 O Maximum Demand Load Current 100 000 Select the journal entry entries to change Voltage THD Fund Normalized A Voltage THD Fund Normalized B tage THD Fund Normalized C tage THD Fund Normalized N tage THD RMS Normalized A N tage THD RMS Normalized B N tage THD RMS Normalized C N tage THD RMS Normalized N G tage TID Fund Normalized A tage TID Fund Normalized B tage TID Fund Normalized C tage TID Fund Normalized N Current THD RMS Normalized C Current THD RMS Normalized N Current TID Fund Normalized Current TID Fund Normalized Current TID Fund Normalized Current TID Fund Normalized Current TID RMS Normalized A Current TID RMS Normalized B Currrent TID RMS Normalized C Current TID RMS Normalized N Current Harmonic
252. r Dmd Total Reactive Power Dmd Total Apparent Power Dmd Total Average PF Over Last Interval Peak Real Power Dmd Total Var Dmd Coincident w Pk W Dmd VA Dmd Coincident w Pk W Dmd Avg PF Coincident w Pk W Dmd Peak Reactive Power Dmd Total W Dmd Coincident w Pk Var Dmd VA Dmd Coincident w Pk Var Dmd Avg PF Coincident w Pk Var DMd Peak Apparent Power Dmd Total W Dmd Coincident w Pk W Dmd Var Dmd Coincident w Pk VA Dmd Avg PF Coincident w Pk VA Dmd Predicted Real Power Dmd Total Predicted Reactive Power Dmd Total Predicted Apparent Power Dmd Total Current Demand A Current Demand B Current Demand C Average Current Demand Peak Current Demand A Peak Current Demand B Peak Current Demand C Average Peak Current Demand Enable periodic sampling I High High limit enabled oO High High limit 1 1 00 limit enable Fgh int jm Lowlimitenabled o o o Lowimi o ooo Low Low imitenabed Lowlowimi po Deadbandendbed o E Deadband 0 00 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 10 33 J 5560 QOS 10 34 Demand values are computed as the average value over the demand interval which can be programmed as a dif ferent value than the periodic readings Under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE is a check box in the value field opposite Demand The box enables the trending of values listed in Demand page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked
253. r for the UPS report instead of selecting an instrument the user selects one or more instrument pairs The purpose of the UPS Verification Answer Module is to verify that the UPS or another mitigation device is functioning properly A UPS DataNode pair consists of a DataNode monitoring the input of the UPS and another DataNode monitoring the output of the UPS This was designed to be done with DataNodes that support cross triggering If the UPS is functioning properly the DataNode at the UPS output will only see cross triggered events If the DataNodes being used do not support cross triggering then no event should be seen on the output DataNode However without cross triggering the absence of an event is not conclusive The status determined by the UPS Verification Answer Module may be one of the following Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page PASS The UPS DataNode Pair has a status of PASS when an event is seen at the input DataNode and only the cross triggered event is seen on the output The UPS has been determined to be functioning properly as the disturbance on the input was not seen on the output FAIL The UPS DataNode Pair has a status of FAIL when an event is seen at the input DataNode and a disturbance event is also seen on the output DataNode within the time window defined at setup The UPS has been determined to be not functioning properly Indeterminate The UPS DataNode Pair has a status of Indeterm
254. r sections Energy Usage kWHr Energy Usage kvarHr Demand Max kW and Expense Summary Aggregated Energy Expense Report Microsoft Internet Explorer i O x H09 55304 2002 10 01 00 00 00 to 2002 11 01 00 00 00 Rate Structure Rate Structure 1 Aggregated Energy Expense om em mem oaae een Doe ies EE EAS ea e NN NUT NUNT UNT NN NN NS i Usage c D GI ECRECNYEGECAESNESZN pe xo omo om o ow oov ocu ovd o 0nd o o Sample Aggregated Energy Expense Report 5 9 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page s Energy Expense The Energy Expense features a query setup to enable users to generate an expense report for each DataNode Data is only available when the Energy Usage Answer Module is installed maz Gjgnature System InfoNode Home S Re Real time Setup Energy Expense Report Display Display in New Window DataNodes H09 5540 H09 5571 v Range Last month C From 2002 1 1 19 00 00 00 to 2002 11 71 9 16 23 31 Top 10 Increment Weekly J ve i Rate Structure Pate Structure 1 J Refresh this page to update the selection control contents and select default values Select the DataNode of interest Select date time range of interest Click on the Display or the Display in New Window button to initiate the query The results will appear either in this window or a new window depending on the button you click Copyright 1999 2002 Dran
255. r to V2 6 most trending pages are hidden and need to be enabled for display see Note on page 8 3 Basic tab When exiting from the page a save confirmation window appears Click on Yes to save changes Click on No to exit the menu tab without saving changes NOTE All trending tabs operate in the same manner the difference being the parameter measured Therefore the same description of how to use can appear once and not be repeated 5 Metering tab Properties Values Enable Trending This page Basic Metering Metering MMXUO ral Selectthe journal entry entries to change Line Neutral Voltage A N Line Neutral Voltage B N Line Neutral Voltage C N Neutral Ground Voltage Line Line Voltage A B Line Line Voltage B C Line Line Voltage C A Line Current A Line Current B Line Current C Line Current N B C Enable Periodic Sampling Low limit Apparent Power A Apparent power B Apparent Power C Total Apparent Power Power Factor A Power Factor B Power Factor C Average Power Factor Angle Between Phases A phase to neutral or phase to phase values displayed depend upon the Wiring Configuration set under the Basic tab Angle Between Phases B Angle Between Phases C Frequency Isi High limit enabled High limit Low limit enabled oiu o Ds LH e e c eo Low Low limit enabled Low Low limit eL o Deadband enabled Deadband bud o The R
256. rameter does not comply with EN50160 Harmonic Compliance Limit Values Harmonic Number Limit 2 2 3 5 4 1 5 6 6 thru 24 0 5 7 5 9 1 5 11 3 5 13 3 15 0 5 17 2 19 1 5 21 0 5 23 1 5 25 1 5 The general approach of EN50160 is to express all voltage characteristics by reference to the nominal voltage or declared voltage as appropriate The DC following are the Harmonic Compliance Limit values in relation to the nominal voltage Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 10 7 J 5560 QOS Compliance Limits in QOS Setup and Reports Low Voltage Supply nominal voltage Un upper limit 1Kv Medium Voltaqe Supply Characteristics declared voltage Uc range 1kV to 35kV 10 8 Category Power frequency with synchronous connection to an interconnected system Power frequency with no synchronous connection to an interconnected system Magnitude of the supply voltage In low voltage systems declared and nominal voltage are equal Supply voltage variations Under normal operating conditions excluding situations arising from faults or voltage interruptions Rapid voltage changes Supply voltage dips Short interruptions of the supply voltage Temporary power frequency overvoltage between live conductors and earth Transient overvoltages between live conductors and earth Supply voltage unbalance Under normal operating conditions Harmonic voltage Under normal operating con
257. range and which DataNodes are to be included in the views 35 3D RMS Mag Dur View 3 D Mag dur graphs show the number of RMS variations of a specified range of magnitude and duration also called bins For example an RMS variation with a magnitude of 80 90 of nominal and 1 5 cycles in duration is one bin whereas 80 90 and 10 30 cycles is another 70 80 and 10 30 cycles is another and so on Each time that the charac teristics of an RMS variation match the criteria of the bin the counter is incremented Certain types of phenomena are typically found in certain bin groupings such as sags cleared by fuses versus sags cleared by breaker operations versus sags caused by the starting of large horsepower motors versus the swells caused by loads being turned off and the response time of the automatic tap changer In the 3 D mag dur graph it is a quick visual way to see what category most of the disturbances fall into This helps determine the source of the disturbance H 8 5530 H 8 5540 H 8 5571 3D Magnitude Duration Histogram Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Views Page 33 RMS Mag Dur View The RMS Magnitude and Duration graph is a plot of the magnitude of the event versus duration of the event with the time plotted on a logarithmic scale A data point is plotted for each event and the graph is overlaid with equipment susceptible or safe operating type curves such as the ITIC curve or CBEMA Events that fall bet
258. ration Wye EN50160 Synchronized to Grid v Um H7 9960 DataNode with m IU m Compliance Setup Strict Tabs available under Strict compliance CC 4 General and Basic 4 gt General Basic Save Setup 4 Basic tab shown mmz Signature System InfoNode Reports Real time Setup 7 DataNode address 198 69 18 134 Password Power System Voltage Class Medium Voltage PT Primary 1 00000000 PT Secondary 1 00000000 Declared Voltage 120 0 Wiring configuration we Synchronized to Grid Compliance Setup v 5560 DataNode with Mains Signalling Compliance Setup Custom Frequencies to Trend 125 185 175 Tabs available under Custom compliance General Basic RMS Variations Transients Metering Revenue Demand Adv Energy Adv Metering Imbalance Harmonics Flicker Adv Harmonics jsp General Basic RMS Variations Transients Metering Revenue Demand X Adv Ener Transducers Advanced Accumulated Save Setup Resets Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 10 23 J 5560 QOS 10 24 5560 DataNode Tabs The parameters available in each tab are discussed in detail in the next sections Note the following conventions used in t
259. re impulsive transients as small as 1 microsecond These transients are the positive and or negative value above or below the low frequency waveshape These are only enabled if the flicker tab is disabled The crest factor or instantaneous peak is the absolute peak sample value within one cycle The high frequency peak detector and instantaneous transients are triggerable for voltage and current Under the CYCLE COUNTS the user can define a number of cycles of waveform to record prior to the a 5530 5520 DataNode Setup 8 8 trigger point This is set under the value field Number of pre trigger cycles Users can also define the number of cycles of waveform to record after the trigger This value is set under Number of post trigger cycles Typical values for these settings are and 2 respectively Setting these values to 0 causes one cycle of data to be recorded for each event the cycle in which the transient was detected Note also that the cycle of waveform containing the trigger point is always recorded For example if the pre trigger cycle count is and the post trigger count is set to 2 then a total of 4 cycles including the cycle containing the trigger point of waveform and peak detector values are recorded Under INDIVIDUAL CHANNEL PARAMETERS letters A B and C represent different channels N stands for neutral while G stands for ground conductor The channel values are pre defined and automatically set depending upon the
260. re also displayed along with time and date of occurrence A sample min max table is shown below Z Compliance Summary Report Microsoft Internet Explorer i B x Edison SE 5560 11 11 2002 10 00 00 to 11 15 2002 17 10 00 admin Compliance Summary Report Min Max Tables Min Max Avg 0 00 1 91 0 25 11 15 2002 06 00 00 11 15 2002 11 10 00 117 98 125 36 12216 1112 2002 08 00 00 11 13 2002 00 10 00 Power Frequency V Unbalance 82 81 Magnitude of Supply Voltage Rms Voltage Maximum Values Phase A Phase B Phase C PanaVeo chanot 125 36 124 28 124 64 11713 2002 00 10 00 11 11 2002 21 30 00 11 1 3 2002 00 10 00 0 45 0 41 0 43 11 14 2002 07 59 59 11 1 4 2002 07 59 59 11 14 2002 07 59 59 Maximum Values Harmonic Phase A Phase B Phase C PUE 3 56 3 89 3 97 11 11 2002 21 40 00 11 11 2002 21 40 00 11 11 2002 21 40 00 0 73 0 68 0 71 11 15 2002 05 00 00 11 14 2002 12 20 00 11 14 2002 19 30 00 R 4 05 4 05 4 48 11 11 2002 21 40 00 11 11 2002 21 40 00 11 11 2002 21 40 00 0 64 053 95 11 14 2002 13 50 00 11 14 2002 13 50 00 11 14 2002 13 50 00 2 50 3 20 3 06 Harmonic values up to order 11 14 2002 12 50 00 11 11 2002 10 50 00 11 14 2002 13 00 00 no 25 complete harmonic 0 14 047 017 values not captured on 5 IT E ONE FUTURI i Screen 10 18 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS
261. reater than High Low Low less than Low Deadband is the equivalent of sensitivity The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place For example if the Displacement Power Factor is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the Displacement Power Factor goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis then the event is recorded Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup a 10 Unbalance tab Enable Trending This page Unbalance and Sequence Components Sequence MSQIO O Select the journal entry entries to change Sequence Voltage Pos Sequence Voltage Neg Sequence Voltage Zero Sequence Current Pos Sequence Current Neg Sequence Current Zero V Imbalance L N dev from avg A N V Imbalance L N dev from avg B N V Imbalance L N dev from avg C N V Imbalance L L dev from avg A B V Imbalance L L dev from avg B C V Imbalance L L dev from avg C A V Imbalance L N Max from avg V Imbalance L L Max from avg V Imbalance Neg Seq Method V Imbalance Zero Seq Method Imbalance dev from avg A Imbalance dev from avg B Imbalance dev from avg C Imbalance Max dev from avg Imbalance Neg Seq Method Imbalance
262. reboot value field To execute both procedures at one time activate Do both of the above To save memory space the administrator or user may choose to activate Don t save data from next download To discard the most recent journal ID entries activate the Clear last journal ID value field Finally parameters for downloading new or updated firmware are available under ONE TIME FIRMWARE OPERATIONS A firmware is a program or instruction stored in Flash memory which implements the communications interface and data acquisition between the outside world and the instrument Based on the parameters available the administrator or user can activate value fields to Load IOP firmware or to Load ACP firmware or to Load both IOP and ACP firmware The IOP and ACP firmware are two different sets of firmware The IOP communicates directly with the InfoNode while the ACP is comprised of the host CPU and DSP If the value fields are activated new firmware is downloaded on demand from InfoNode to DataNode New firmware is downloaded automatically if the boot ROM finds that the existing firmware in the DataNode is missing or corrupt The administrator or user also has the option to Load Both IOP and ACP firmware to all DataNodes Download is accomplished using the standard Internet File Transfer Protocol FTP The DataNode must be connected to the network where the updates are to be extracted from to ensure a successful download Since these one time oper
263. remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Under SELECT THE JOURNAL ENTRY ENTRIES TO CHANGE highlight the phase value parameter you wish to change then check the Enable periodic sampling box Check the threshold enable box and then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest 10 35 10 36 5560 QOS Threshold enable refers to the checkboxes opposite the limits Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son that is higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that is higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded 9 Advanced Metering tab Properties Enable Trending Advanced Metering Adv Metering MAD VO Selectthe journal entry entries to change Total VA Arith Method Total VA Vect Method Total Fund VA Arth Method Total Fund VA Vect Method Worst True Power Factor Total Arithmetic True PF Total Vector True PowerFactor Displacement Power Factor A Displacement Power Factor B Displacement Power Factor C Worst Displacement Power Factor Average Displacement PF Tot
264. ription fields The Serial Number and Version of the DataNode hard ware are set by default This instrument specific informa tion is available only for viewing and cannot be altered or changed from the InfoNode STATUS INFORMATION properties include Active which describes current communications interface between the DataNode and the InfoNode system When checked this means that the DataNode is actively com municating and exchanging information with the system When making changes in the different value settings of a DataNode it is wise to uncheck the Active box first make the changes then check the Active box again This helps ease and speed up processing time Also when adding a new DataNode the Active box must be checked to establish link with the DataNode site Click the Home page to check which DataNodes are actively communicat ing with the InfoNode Users also have the option to Get settings from DataNode on activation When checked or enabled the default DataNode settings will be re configured and re displayed The settings in the DataNode will overwrite those in the InfoNode and be used for monitoring Remember to click the Save Setup button found at the bottom of the page to save any change that have been done To aid users a Save confirmation window appears after changes have been made and when users are about to switch to a different tab Status properties also records the date and time of Last contact It also i
265. roperties to indicate recipient notification status Only those with Admin privileges may set whether to dispatch notifications or not Users who access the InfoNode system as Guest Viewer or Operator will find the General properties automatically disabled They are not allowed to dispatch notifications nor change time settings when notifications will be sent to recipients Notifications pending a counter on the number of notifications that will be dispatched to recipients at specified time interval The counter will reset to zero once the pending notifications are sent to recipients The counter sets automatical ly and is not user programmable Dispatch notifications the enable disable checkbox indicate whether recipients will receive not receive notifications Aggregation period seconds the time interval upon which notifications are sent to recipients and updated Notifications update is done every specified number of seconds i e every 900 sec 15 minutes Signature System InfoNode Setup Notifications pending Dispatch notifications Aggregation period seconds 900 munications 6 Battery 6 Time Ei Regional Settings j 4 gt P General Save Setup Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Biectrotek Concepts Inc Al rights reserved User Agreement Recipients setup screen General tab properties To Add Delete Recipient names Right click on the Recipient folder
266. rotek Concepts s xl Compliance Statistical Bar Chart Power Frequency In case of fault operation parts of an interconnected system may become isolated Compliance will be assessed over an observation period of one week by a statistical analysis carried out over the sequence of 10 seconds measurements Frequency is represented by a single value and a single bar The bar is a hyperlink to the Power Frequency Graph See page 10 17 Supply Voltage Variations Under normal operating con ditions load changes cause variations of the 10 minute average supply voltage Generally this is compensated by automatic voltage regulation within a period of a few tens of seconds Supply Voltage Variations display a cluster of bars one for each phase The color of each bar indicates the compliance status for its phase A green bar indicates that the parameter is within compliance A red bar indi cates that the parameter does not comply with EN50160 Rapid Voltage Changes Flicker Typical rapid voltage changes do not exceed a magnitude of 5 or 5 of the nominal or declared voltage This limitation is possi ble because connection of loads capable of creating rapid voltage changes is usually subjected to regulations But under certain conditions higher values up to 10 may occasionally occur These higher values can occur for instance in areas where higher power motor equipment blowers pumps compressors etc is used Flickers dis play a c
267. rresponding reporting or logging action should take place For example if the Displacement Power Factor is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the Displacement Power Factor goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low limit plus the hysteresis then the event is recorded 10 37 10 38 5560 QOS 10 Unbalance tab Properties Imbalance and Sequence Components Sequence MSQIO Values Enable Trending This page 4 Select the journal entry entries to change Sequence Voltage Pos Sequence Voltage Neg Sequence Voltage Zero Sequence Current Pos Sequence Current Neq Sequence Current Zero V Imbalance L N dev from avg A N V Imbalance L N dev from avg B N V Imbalance L N dev from avg C N LL dev from avg A B LL dev from avg B C LL dev from avg C A L N Max from avg L L Max from avg Neg Seq Method Zero Seq Method Imbalance dev from avg A Imbalance dev from avg B Imbalance dev from avg C Imbalance Max dev from avg Imbalance Neg Seq Method Imbalance Zero Seq Method Enable periodic sampling High High limit enabled O High limit enabled High limit Low limit enabled Low threshold Low Low limit enabled Low Low limit Deadband enabled Deadband The voltage and current imbalance for each phase from the average value f
268. rs may result if the voltage and current signals are not correctly paired Under TRANSDUCER Voltage Phase A Channel 1 RATIOS users can set values for the Transducer Primary Voltage Phase B Channel 2 and Transducer Secondary Values to account for any Voltage Phase C Channel 3 voltage or current transformers can be entered for each input Voltage Neutral Channel 4 channel The primary and secondary values are entered For Current Phase A Channel 5 example if the primary voltage is 2400 volts and the sec Current Phase B Channel 6 ondary voltage is 120 volts then those values should be entered This gives an effective 20 1 reduction in voltage Ed d eine When the input voltage to the DataNode is 120V the displayed value will be 2400 volts The Magnitude correction Phase correction and DC offset values are not programmable 15 Advanced tab Enable sending rms trigger Enable responding to received rms trigger Enbable sending transient trigger O Enable responding to received transient trigger Li Broadcast address if empty uses local Communications When configurations differ use the DataNode setup click to display use the DataNode setup drop down use the InfoNode setup menu Passwords kkk User Account Password Admin Account Password SEP InfoNode Access User ID admin kkk RK InfoNode Access Password Firmware Access User ID admin Firmware Access Password rec old One Time Cperetons Reset 302 Default Setup
269. rted to correct mistakes in wiring Voltage Phase A Channel 1 Voltage Phase B Channel 2 Voltage Phase C Channel 3 Voltage Neutral Channel 4 Current Phase A Channel 5 Current Phase B Channel 6 Current Phase C Channel 7 Current Neutral Channel 8 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide The DataNode employs two A D converters to sample the voltage and current channels for a given phase simultaneously Measurement errors may result if the voltage and current signals are not correctly paired Under TRANSDUCER RATIOS users can set values for the Transducer Primary and Transducer Secondary Values to account for any voltage or current transformers can be entered for each input channel The primary and secondary values are entered For example if the primary voltage is 2400 volts and the secondary voltage is 120 volts then those values should be entered This gives an effective 20 1 reduction in voltage When the input voltage to the DataNode is 120V the displayed value will be 2400 volts The Magnitude correction Phase correction and DC offset values are not programmable 8 23 8 24 5530 5520 DataNode Setup 15 Advanced tab Properties Values Cross Triggering Broadcast Group ID 1234 Enable sending rms trigger m Enable responding to received rms trigger H Enbable sending transient trigger O Enable responding to received transient trigger O Broadcast address if empty uses local Communications When configurations dif
270. s and scroll bar to view the different properties and values available on screen Properties column Signature System InfoNode Home S Reports Setup i FE InfoNode Real time f Setup Properties DataNode address Please Confirm x Communications Values column scroll Storage Log Notifications Communications Password PT Primary bar Battery PT Secondary Base Voltage Vrms Wiring configuration Time 9 Regional Settings AnswerModule Basic Characterizer EN50160 Time between periodic samples min Demand Interval min Demand Sub Interval min Instruments thresholds set in 5 6 Impulse Test 5530 E 5540 DataNode 5560 DataNode 5571 DataNode de ALAN General Basic RMS Variations Do you wantto keep the changes EE EL RN Volts Transients eltering Revenue A Demand Adv Ener _ rf Save Setup Se Copyright amp 1999 2002 Dranetz Bhl and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement scroll bar Save Setup button Save Changes confirmation window Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5530 5520 DataNode Setup a This chapter describes the procedures on how to program the 5530 5520 DataNode It covers the following topics DataNode Tabs Where Data for Programmed Settings Appear Programming the Tabs DataNode Tabs The General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes fo
271. s d rfen KEINE Anschl sse an das Instrument unter stromf hrenden Spannungsleitungen montiert werden Die Verbindungen m ssen zuerst am Instrument und danach an der zu berwachenden Schaltung hergestellt werden Tragen Sie Schutzbrillen und Isolierhandschuhe wenn Sie Anschl sse an den Stromkreisen vornehmen H nde Schuhe und Fu boden m ssen trocken sein wenn Sie Anschl sse an den Stromkreisen durch f hren Stellen Sie sicher da das Ger t AUSgeschaltet ist bevor Sie an der r ckw rtigen Konsole Me f hler anschlie en Pr fen Sie vor jedem Gebrauch alle Kabel auf Bruchstellen und Risse in der Isolierung Wechseln Sie schadhafte Kabel sofort aus Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide FCC Statement This device has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accor dance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his her own expense ix
272. s of a series of tab pages The pages are labelled as follows Home Views Reports Real time and Setup Each tab page has its own tree directory located in the left window pane The tree can be expanded or collapsed Click on the plus sign to expand the tree and show more options available Click on the minus sign to collapse the tree one level backward All detailed tab page information is found in the right window pane The InfoNode system provides a direct no fuss interface which displays information called out in tab hyperlink and button format Each tab is provided with a Help option to provide users with immediate onscreen assistance Below is a sample screen showing the five main tab pages of the Signature System InfoNode main menu tabs of the InfoNode System N zm sw Signature System InfoNo e BM Home Views Reports Real time Setup 5 Infonode Status Welcome back admin to InfoNode B Help Introduction The InfoNode is connected to no Data B index Since your last time here no disturba DataNode information DataNode health status The Home page provides basic status information about the InfoNode and DataNodes connected along with easy access to the first last and most recent events in memory The Views page provides access to three interactive sections the QOS Quality of Supply Status Timeline and Smart Views The QOS module is designed to monitor and r
273. send Transient disturbances event notifica tions to recipients Threshold properties for the different Transient Disturbance Categories have been set under the Basic Characterizer Transient Disturbance Categories tab see page 7 20 The Enable Category allows users to select which category they want to activate and as per the transient disturbance category definition on page 7 20 register as transient event This selective enabling process allows users more control over the event notifications they receive ESEw Signature System InfoNode Properties Enable Transient Notification v Transient Disturbance Categories Category 1 zy 2 Category 4 Category 5 Category 6 Category 7 Enable Category E E E E ED En EH 4 Pf Recipients X RMS Disturbances Transient Disturbances K Threshold Crossings j rf Save Setup Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz EMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement DataNode Transient Disturbances event notification setup The Enable Threshold Crossing Notification must be checked to allow the system to send specified parameter threshold crossing notifications to recipients The Threshold Registers lists the parameters available for which various threshold limits can be defined Click on a parameter i e Harmonic Voltage and select the threshold limit s High High High Normal Low Low Low Deadband that you want enab
274. sired category then set the corresponding threshold property limit see definitions of the threshold properties below Assign different threshold limits for each category Once the threshold limits are crossed and the Category Enabled box checked the Transient disturbance category will be classified as an event These pre defined Transient disturbance event categories are then reported as signal notifications to recipients see page 7 10 For example in the Transient Disturbance Categories setup screen below Category 2 was selected Limit values for Category 2 were defined in the respective threshold property fields The Category Enabled box has been checked to acti vate Category 2 as an event when threshold limits have been crossed Values Transient Disturbance Categories m 1 Category 3 Category 4 Category 5 Category 6 Category 7 Category Enabled Minimum Magnitude zz Maximum Magnitude 2 server Category Name Radial Fault Location 55 taNode m 5540 DataNode D RMS Disturbance Categories Transient Disturbance Categories 3 Save Setup Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Setup screen for Transient Disturbance Categories Category Enabled For this to be a disturbance category it must be enabled Check the box to activate or clear the box to deactivate Min
275. specified in the Channel Scale to convert input sig nal to mbar The Averaging Interval property indicates how often the value should be saved The values are read as fast as possible to allow trigger checking as specified on the Advanced tab Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide ADAM Handler Setup 7 Advanced tab Signature System InfoNode Channel Thresholds Channel 0 Channel 1 High High Threshold Enabled High High Threshold High Threshold Enabled High Threshold Low Threshold Enabled Low Threshold Low Low Threshold Enabled Low Low Threshold Save Setup Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz B il and Electrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement The Advance tab is available for all analog and counter modules It allows the specification of threshold limits for the input channels The tab shows each channel available for the selected module and range The channels are labeled Channel 0 through Channel n where n is the number of channels available By selecting one of the entries in the list you will be setting the thresholds for that channel There are 4 threshold settings available These are used to specify the four available threshold trigger levels Low Low Low High and High High Each threshold can be independently enabled and set 12 11 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide ADAM Handler Setup This page intentionally left blank 12 12 Si
276. sum of all phase currents including neutral Neutral Conductor One of the conductors of a three phase wye system Sometimes called the return conductor it carries the entire current of a single phase circuit and the resultant current in a three phase system The neutral conductor is bonded to the ground on the output of a three phase delta wye transformer Peak The maximum instantaneous measurement of an electri cal event Peak Detected Transient High frequency deviation from low frequency or normal sine wave value in either the positive or negative direc tion that exceeds programmed limits Periodic Reading Interval Time interval used to periodically record the parameter for trending or time plots Phase The timing between two or more events tied to the same frequency Phase Balancing The practice of placing equal electrical loads on each leg of a three phase system See balance and neutral conduc tor Phase Shift The displacement in time of one periodic waveform rela tive to other waveforms Positive Sequence The three phase vectors that would make a motor rotate in the positive direction U14 1 3 Ua a Ub a Uc where a is the 120 degree vector operator a is the 240 degree vector operator Power The capacity for doing work In the electrical environ ment this is usually measured in watts A 9 A 10 Appendix Power Factor Watts divided by volt amperes or the ratio of actual power to a
277. t The user selects the types of events they want included in the report by checking the box es next to the desired event type s See figure below Iv RMS Variations M Transients Other Event Summaries Specific Query Setup 3 Top 10 Events The Top 10 Events Report of the Standard Reports is very similar to that of the Smart Reports The Standard Report version allows the user to select the method or criteria for determining which events will be included in the report The method options are magnitude duration area or category The user may specify whether to include sags swells and or transients The user may also select to include time plots of only the triggered phase the worst phase or all monitored phases See figure below for the additions to the Query Setup for this report 3 Event Statistics Event Statistics Report is a series of statistical analysis reports that you select for RMS variations and or tran sients The selections are shown in the following figure RMS Variations Iv RMS Magnitude Duration Iv Magnitude Histogram Iv Duration Histogram Transients Magnitude Histogram l Duration Histogram Frequency Histogram Method Include Plots Display Trigger Phase J Iv Sags Swells M Transients Top 10 Events Specific Query Setup Event Statistics Specific Query Setup RMS Variations RMS Mag Dur a plot of the magnitude of the event versus duration of the
278. t to a directed broadcast address other than the local network if desired but results cannot be guaranteed and data may be lost if the message takes too long to arrive at its destina tion Checkboxes are seen opposite the next four items Enable sending rms trigger Enable responding to received rms trigger Enable sending transient trigger Enable responding to received transient trigger The user specifies which event types are generated and or listened for through these checkboxes When said parameters are activated the system in effect utilizes trigger messages as trip signals If Broadcast address is empty message broadcast is routed through the local network The user specifies a group ID and optionally a broadcast address Under COMMUNICATIONS users are given the option to return to the default InfoNode or DataNode settings When configurations differ and communication errors occur Access privileges are determined under PASSWORDS The passwords entered in the InfoNode system must match the ones stored under the Password section of the DataNode Otherwise access to information may be denied The User Account Password and Admin Account Password refer to two different user categories An Admin User can create and add an account for a new Basic User Both Admin and Basic users can assign properties such as their own user name and password Refer to the Users section on Chapter 7 Setup Page for more details on this Signature System In
279. t 11 15 2002 15 30 00 admin Compliance Graph Edison SE 5560 Compliance Statistics Summary Graph Power frequency 7 Supply Voltage Variations 1 4 Supply Voltage Unbalance gu JI 4 ee eeii Mains Signalling O 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 30 90 100 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS 3 Event Statistics The EN50160 DISDIP table is based upon the statistics calculated by the 5560 Answer Module It includes the Table for Transient Overvoltages and the EN50160 DISDIP 3D Graph UNIPEDE DISDIP data is collected and saved on a weekly basis with the counts reset as the final save occurs If additional data is detected for an evaluation period after that period has been saved that interval data is retrieved and updated The DISDIP sag and swells table is shown below All data required for this table is collected and saved The observations containing the weekly data are marked for one year expiration allowing the data to be retained in the InfoNode for at least one year E Compliance Summary Report Microsoft Internet Explorer ioj x Edison SE 5560 11 11 2002 10 00 00 to 11 15 2002 15 40 00 admin Compliance Summary Report Event Statistics UNIPEDE DISDIP Statistics Duration msec msec sec sec sec sec min min From To less than 10 100 100 500 0 5 1 1 3 3 20 20 lt 60 1 lt 3 3 Dips m 0 10
280. t count is a hyperlink to EN50160 Transient DISDIP table for Transient Events and Transient Overvoltages See page 10 15 10 5 10 6 5560 QOS Compliance Statistical Graph The Compliance Statistical Bar Chart shown below displays the seven parameters that are required for determining com pliance The bar chart indicates the percentage of the intervals passing the specified compliance criteria The color of the bar indicates the compliance status A green bar indicates that the parameter is within compliance A red bar indicates that the parameter does not comply with EN50160 Standard The graph atuoscales to enable maximum viewing The minimum value on the left of the horizontal axis will be the 1096 multiple that is less than the lowest compliance level for the seven parameters displayed If the value is less than 196 the bar will graph 196 so that is visible See text below for the description of each parameter For QOS compliance limits of each parameter refer to the Compliance Limits in QOS Setups and Reports table on page 10 8 73 Compliance Statistics Microsoft Internet Explorer Compliance Statistics 11 11 2002 10 00 00 to 11 15 2002 10 30 00 Edison SE 5580 Compliance Statistics Summary Graph i T GL GL a Ht u2 0L u4 0GE Powe enya n ie ee i uu Supply Voltage Unibalance AQ Mains Signalling T 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 Be Ge ee Eee ee 80 90 100 Dranetz BMI Bect
281. taNode site setup display with General tab selected as active screen z Home Reports Real time f Setup Setup TE cAMP Notifications iam Communications 5 Battery 6 Time 6 Regional Settings AnswerModule Get settings from DataNode on activation Basic Characterizer Last contact at EN50160 Heath specific Signature System InfoNode Identification Information Impulse Test 5530 i arrow keys J tabs I General Basic X RMS Variations Transients X Metering Revenue Demand Adv Ener Save Setup Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 29 7 30 Setup Page 8 Parameters are enabled when Value settings appear in blue or black and the field is clickable Users may make appropriate changes on enabled parameters anytime 9 Parameters are disabled when value settings appear in gray Disabled value settings have either been configured as such so they cannot be altered or they need to be acti vated in order to trend the values listed on the page 10 After putting in the desired value changes click on the Save Setup button You must always save the changes you made before exiting or selecting a different setup tab Otherwise the changes will not take effect To help ensure that changes are saved a c
282. ter upon log in The Java wizard program will install the setup files necessary for your computer to support the Signature System interactive controls If you do not allow installation of the Java program then some InfoNode screens will not be visible and you will not be able to take advantage of some features of the Signature System The setup program will not change any system configuration It just stores a small number of Java files on your computer Once installation is done the program will prompt you to click on Finish to complete setup You may have to restart your web browser once setup is complete Home Page The Home page provides basic system status information and links to events that occurred since you last logged on The Home page is automatically displayed after Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Home Page successfully logging on or by selecting the Home tab In the left hand frame of the page you will see the InfoNode Status and Help options The InfoNode Status displays general information on both the DataNode and InfoNode see sample screen display next page Click on one of the underscored links or hyperlinks on the right hand screen display to go directly to the event detail or status information You may log out of the InfoNode at any time by closing your browser Note that some pages may take longer than usual to download when viewed for the first time or after a firmware revision has been upl
283. terruptions and transients and only includes the 10 most severe events of each type The severity of the events is based on their category Events of each type are displayed in chronological order with the most recent event appearing first Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page DataNode Summary Report Display Display in New Window DataNodes EPQ 5530 Range Today T C From 09 05 2001 00 00 00 to 09 05 2001 14 58 38 Specify Report Headings Refresh this page to update the selection control contents and select default values Select the DataNode of interest Select date time range of interest Click on the Display or the Display in New Window button to initiate the query The results will appear either in this window or a new window depending on the button you click Smart Reports Query Selection Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page H Standard Reports Standard Reports provide the user with a greater ability to customize the contents of each report The Smart Reports Query Setup is also used for the standard reports with each Standard Report adding query parame ters that are specific to its report type 3 Event Summaries The Event Summaries Report of the Standard Reports is very similar to that of the Smart Reports The Standard Report version allows the user to select which event types will be included in the repor
284. tes and stores apparent energy VA Real Power W and Apparent Power VA are reset together you cannot reset one without resetting the other Likewise the Watthour Meter and Varhour Meter are reset together The system uses the fundamental frequency as reference for calculating energy values in one of two modes forward or reverse In forward mode the circuit monitor Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS considers the direction of power flow allowing the accu mulated energy magnitude to both increase and decrease In reverse mode the circuit monitor accumulates energy as positive regardless of the direction of power flow In other words the energy value increases even during reverse power flow The default accumulation mode is reverse 10 47 J 5560 QOS EN50160 Compliance Default Trending Setup TAB WHERE DEFAULT VALUES PARAMETERS FOUND STATUS amp COMMENTS Total Fund Freq Q ADV ENERGY OFF Fund Freq VA Hrs ADV ENERGY OFF Fwd Fund Freq varHrs ADV ENERGY OFF Fwd Fund Freg WHrs ADV ENERGY OFF Rvs Fund Freq varHrs ADV ENERGY OFF Rvs Fund Freq WHrs ADV ENERGY OFF Rms Current Individual Harmonics ADV HARMONICS OFF Rms Voltage Individual Harmonics ADV HARMONICS ON 2 25 for Va Vb Vc Limits per table Arith Sum PF ADV METER OFF Arithmetic Sum DF ADV METER OFF Arithmetic Sum VA ADV METER OFF Displacement Power Factor ADV METER OFF Fund Arithmetic Sum VA ADV MET
285. the names of recipients who will receive notifications when the InfoNode starts up operation See page 7 5 for the procedure on how to add delete recipients Signature System InfoNode Real time Setup als gt I gt Recipients cn E Save Setup Copyright 1999 2003 Dranetz BMI and Bectrotek Concepts Inc Al rights reserved User Agreement InfoNode Start up notification setup Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 12 Setup Page Communications The Communications data folder contains information on Internet Protocols and network settings 3S ADAM ADAM Instrument and Communications Handler Setup The ADAM handler supports the Advantech ADAM 4000 and 5000 series of distributed general purpose I O modules All input modules are supported through the ADAM instrument handler Relay output functions for notifications are set as part of the communications handler At this time only input modules are supported with the exception of the notifica tion feature Port Setup tab Select ADAM on the setup tree under the Communications branch When selected the following property page is dis played The Port Setup tab is used to Enable ADAM communications The Enable control must be checked for any com munications to ADAM modules to occur All ADAM communications will occur on the indicated port Set the COM Port that will be used for ADAM modules Only one ADAM RS 485 and RS 232 network on on
286. the sample rates only apply to RMS not waveform variations The reason behind storing sampling rates is that the memory capacity of the monitoring instrument makes it impractical to record an entire long duration sag or swell point by point The waveforms before and after the trigger are digitized to help identify the cause of the excursion but only RMS values are stored over the full duration of the event that are longer than the pre and post trigger settings If the event has not ended after a programmed time period the instrument switches to averaging cycles of RMS data to further conserve memory yet accurately represent event At this point the RMS plot diverges from a single valued line to a band of minimum maximum and average values During extremely long events the instrument switches to successively longer averaging periods explained next The sample rates represent three supplemental recording interval or chart speeds defined for recording long events When recording at reduced rates three values are saved for each data point the minimum maximum and average value of the previous interval The Sample min max avg every N cycles refers to the number of cycles to average for the selected reduced sampling rate While Number of seconds to use this rate refer to the number of seconds to record at the selected reduced sam pling rate The following default sequence is used to program reduced sampling rates For 60 Hz systems
287. then enter the value for that threshold Repeat this for all parameters of interest The enable box refers to the Enable periodic sampling parameter Note that the 5560 DataNode has an internal limit on the number of variables it can track for the purpose of periodic recording and limit rule evaluation Indiscriminate selection of parameters should be avoided Each parameter has five threshold limits High high High Low Low Low and Deadband High High limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son that is higher than the high limit High limit specifices an absolute limit for comparison that 1s higher than the low limit Low limit specifies an absolute limit for comparison that is lower than the high limit Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS Low Low limit specifies an absolute limit for compari son lower than the low limit Deadband limit specifies how much a value can change before another event is recorded The High High must be greater than High Low Low less than Low The hysteresis values assigned to limits are set by the system and not programmable by the user All limit values are used to determine if corresponding reporting or logging action should take place For example if a frequency is detected to cross the threshold limit then an event is recorded If the frequency goes from out of limits to within limits that is below the high limit minus the hysteresis and above the low li
288. time your computer starts Click Yes to enable the InfoNode Service auto start or click No to disable auto start In most cases auto start should be enabled to allow an unattended computer running the InfoNode service to automatically recover in case of a power outage Question LLL 9 Would you like the InfoNode Service to run automatically each time the computer is N started Note you can change this setting via the Windows Service Manager at a later time In case users decide to change auto start settings there are two ways to reset the InfoNode start mode Re run the setup program Each time the setup program is run the service registration is updated and the program will ask if you want to enable disable auto start Re running the setup program also allows you to remove the service altogether Use the Windows Service Manager to change auto start settings To do this click on the following menu items Start gt Settings gt Control Panel gt Administrative Tools gt Services Once program installation is complete setup will ask if you want to start the InfoNode service Click Yes to launch InfoNode immediately or click No to close the program Question 4 Lo Would you like to run InfoNode Service Users have the option to manually start stop the InfoNode Service by clicking on the following menu items Start gt Programs gt Signature System InfoNode gt Start InfoNode or Stop InfoNode ff New Office Docu
289. tion is a combination of measurement components Temporal Aggregation The goal of temporal aggregation is to collect all measurements taken by a monitoring instrument or instruments that were due to the same power system occurrence and identify them as one event Aggregation Time This control specifies the width of the temporal aggregation window in seconds Selecting one of the pre defined inter vals from the drop down list sets the aggregation window Aggregation Window Type Fixed When a Fixed aggregation window type is specified the length of the aggregation window is fixed by the aggregation time Thus all measurements occurring within the specified number of seconds are aggregated Variable When a Variable aggregation window is specified the length of the aggregation window is not fixed and is determined by how closely the events occur to each other in time Worst Case Method The Worst Case Method control allows the user to specify which measurement component characteristics are used to represent the aggregated measurement A popular method of performing phase aggregation 1s by finding the worst case measurement component from the measurement components associated with that phase Max V Deviation Using this method the component exhibiting the maximum deviation from nominal voltage is used to represent the aggregate measurement Thus the sag or swell that deviates the farthest in absolute value from nominal volt
290. tional section showing the compliance status of DataNodes is added to the DataNode status table The table indicates which DataNodes are in compliance not in compliance or have undetermined compliance status for the specified interval DataNodes that are non compliant are hyperlinked to the QOS Status view InfoNode Information This table provides the following information about the InfoNode Name Description Model Serial number Firmware version containing the different support packages installed in the InfoNode and Uptime duration Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Home Page fuss Help Much of what is written in this manual can be found in the Help option onscreen Expanding the Help tree will produce Introduction and Index links 5 Introduction The Introduction page orients users that they are currently viewing the Home page Four active buttons are found in this page Contents Index lt lt and gt gt These buttons present different ways to access the same Help information The differences lay only in the way each button organizes and lists information The gt gt button brings the user forward to the next linked page It covers information across pages in all tabs not just the Home tab Some pages have hyperlinks which contain further detailed information on the topic The button brings the user backward to the previously linked page It helps the user scan for information quickly and easil
291. to open dialog box see page 4 4 Event Type Channel RMS Variation Event List 4 1 3 Start Time Char double click on desired event to view details see page 4 5 General Options Of x i Accumulator Interval D Plot Title Plot Title Color black gt Timeline Graph and Event List display The General Options dialog box provides additional options for altering the graph This user preferences command is available only to users assigned the Security Level of Viewer Operator or Administrator This option is not available to Guests Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Font Arial Point Size 10 Il Plain C Bold C Italic C Bold Italic Background Color white gt Percent Only items in black lettering will be saved as preferences Clear Preferences Set as Preference Voltage Display Units Voltage Display Units OK Apply Cancel 4 3 Views Page 4 Graphs support a right mouse button context menu that displays additional options for altering the graph General Properties of the Timeline will allow you to change the title of the graph font type font size back ground color and whether parameters are displayed in units of or magnitude In addition accumulated data such as Energy can be set for display on an internal basis in accumulated values or as a normalized
292. try entries to change Demand tab this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Demand properties and to Select the journal entry entries to change Advanced Energy tab this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Advanced Energy Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide properties and to Select the journal entry entries to change Advanced Metering tab this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Advanced Metering properties and to Select the journal entry entries to change Unbalance tab this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Unbalance properties and to Select the journal entry entries to change Harmonics tab this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Harmonics properties and to Select the journal entry entries to change Flicker tab this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Flicker properties and to Select the journal entry entries to change it also allows the setting of Sample Intervals minutes Advanced Harmonics tab this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Advanced Harmonics properties and to Select the journal entry entries to change Transducers tab features data on Phase rotation Channel Mapping and Transducer Ratios Advanced tab features data on Cross Triggering additional data on Communications Passwords One Time Operations Channel Mapping and One Time Firmware Operations
293. tup NOTE The Administrator mode is accessible only to users with administrative privileges The InfoNode supports log in accounts that have a user name password and security level role associated with each account The InfoNode is able to support 60 to 100 accounts allow basic user privileges limited to viewing for Guest and changing only user preferences data for Viewer i Operator Administrator allow advanced user privileges however only the Administrator can add users and change security levels InfoNode Setup page Above screen shows sample new user account being entered by the System Administrator The Administrator assigns the security level that determines extent of user privileges 7 2 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Proficiency Level Novice or Expert Users may select between Novice or Expert modes which determine the number of DataNode tab settings that can be viewed and the types of reports and views that can be dis played The novice mode allows users to access only the Smart series of items Smart Setup Smart Reports Users assigned the security level of Guest can only view not change DataNode settings All Setup tab options for Guests are disabled The Novice mode displays only those options absolutely essential to the operation of the system This entails only allowing users access to view two 2 DataNode Setup 3 E ORANET om Signature System In
294. ulation mode is reverse 8 27 5530 5520 DataNode Setup Summary of EPQ DataNode Setup Parameters and Tabs Where they can be Found PARAMETERS Active Power Active Power Demand ANSI Transformer Derating Factor Apparent Power Apparent Power Demand Arith Sum PF Arithmetic Sum DF Arithmetic Sum VA AB WHERE FOUND IMETER DEMAND HARMONICS METER DEMAND ADVANCED METER ADVANCED METER ADVANCED METER Avg PF Peak P Dmd DEMAND Avg PF Peak Q Dmd DEMAND urrent Crest Factor HARMONICS urrent THD HARMONICS urrent THD Rms HARMONICS urrent TID HARMONICS urrent TID Rms HARMONICS Displacement Power Factor ADVANCED METER Frequency METER Fund Arithmetic Sum VA ADVANCED METER Fund Freq VA Hrs ADVANCED ENERGY Fund Vector Sum VA ADVANCED METER Fwd Fund Freq varHrs ADVANCED ENERGY Fwd Fund Freq WHrs ADVANCED ENERGY Harmonic Power HARMONICS HRms Voltage HARMON ala LV g IUNBALAN 1 Imbalance SO IUNBALAN NBALANCE Negative Sequence Voltage NBALANCE Net Current ADVANCED METER iP Dmd Peak Q Dmd IDEMAND Peak Active Power Demand Peak Apparent Power Demand IDEMAND Peak Demand Current DEMAND Peak Reactive Power Demand IDEMAND IPF Peak VA Dmd IDEMAND PFDemand 1 1 1 DEMAND Positive Sequence Current NBALANCE Positive Sequence Voltage NBALANCE Predicted P Dmd DEMAND Predicted Q Dmd DEMAND Predicted VA Dmd DEMAND 8 28 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 55
295. und on page 7 29 of Chapter 7 Setup Page provides important background information for this chapter Familiarity with the General Guidelines is advised before continuing on with the discussion below Below is a list of the various 5530 5520 DataNode tabs available and the programmable setups found in each tab The list also notes which tabs are trending pages A trending page contains an enable disable checkbox which allows trending of values listed on that page For DataNodes that use Firmware version prior to V2 6 most trending pages are optional and need to be enabled using the checkboxes found in the Basic tab For DataNodes that use Firmware V2 6 and higher all trending pages are displayed and the enabling checkboxes can be found in the individual tabs General tab features Identification and Status information of a particular DataNode Contains property to activate DataNode Basic tab features Communications Power System Steady State Trending and Thresholds data RMS Variations tab features Limit Pre and Post Event Captures RMS Variations Sampling Intervals and Intervals data Transients tab features Cycle Counts and Individual Channel Parameters data Metering tab this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Metering properties and to Select the journal entry entries to change Revenue tab this trending page features checkboxes to Enable Trending of Revenue properties and to Select the journal en
296. ure System NTP time service a time server must be available A licensed copy of the Tardis 2000 Time Server is included in the InfoNode on PC disc application package This software utility serves as a time server providing a time source for any device including EPQ DataNodes that share the network as the computer where the software is installed The Tardis software can detect the right time in various ways i e accessing Internet based Atomic Clocks using networked time servers Global Positioning System or GPS technology radio clocks and by listening for time broadcasts over a LAN The Service version of Tardis 2000 runs as a Windows 2000 XP service just like any other Windows application service Getting Started To begin installation of Tardis 2000 Time Server insert the CD ROM with the InfoNode program on the disc drive To install the Tardis program on your PC you may either a Click on the Install TARDIS Time Server link provided in the disc OR Browse the contents of the disc to locate the TardisN TPServers WIN2000XP folder then select the tardis2000ntService exe file b Double click the tardis2000ntService exe file InstallShield Self extracting EXE B X Tardis 2000 Service V1 4 Setup is preparing the InstallShield r Wizard which will quide you through the rest of the setup process Please wait NENNT c Follow the instructions on screen and or in the next pages to continue instal
297. urement capability improved billing protection and standardized meter reading and programming WE MetOne DataNode No data available at this time 7 PODIF Import No data available at this time Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide General Guidelines in Setting Up DataNodes through the InfoNode Setup Page The following guidelines help promote smooth and optimal system performance of DataNode program settings Bear in mind that while the InfoNode setup is generic the DataNode is not This means that the InfoNode setup section is not affected by the types of DataNodes connected to it On the other hand the DataNode setup section is customized and dependent on particular DataNode model configurations 1 Privileges to change DataNode settings depend on the Security Level assigned by the system administrator see page 7 2 Without the proper access privileges you can only view the setup pages 2 Make sure to select the appropriate DataNode group that you wish to configure under the DataNode setup tree The Tree Directory of groups and sites is displayed on the left side of the screen It uses the standard convention of collapsible trees and folders 3 Clicking on a plus sign that is adjacent to a DataNode group will open up that folder and display the elements specific DataNodes site s contained within it Clicking on a minus sign will collapse that folder and no longer display the elements within it 4 A
298. urrents Neutral Current sample harmonic values to trend sample interharmonic values to trend The following parameters are found under ENABLE TRENDING THIS PAGE Advanced harmonics Individual and Trend harmonics for phases A B and C Opposite these parameters are checkboxes which enable the trending of values listed in Advanced harmonics page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Voltage and current harmonics for each phase and neutral channel can be trended under HARMONICS TO TREND Similarly voltage and current interharmonics for each phase and neutral channel can also be trended under INTERHARMONICS TO TREND The value fields are left blank to allow the users to choose the numbers or the range of harmonic frequencies to trend Numbers can be entered individually with commas sepa rating the numbers or a range of harmonics can be specified using a dash between lower and upper values Also the suffix o or e can be used to specify only the odd or even harmonics respectively in a given range Resulting individual harmonic sampling and graphs can be seen in the Smart Trends folder under the Views tab Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 14 Transducers tab 5560 QOS Properties 5 vaws j Phase rotation Normal counter clockwise Normal counter clockwise
299. values listed in Advanced harmonics page If the box is checked the settings on the page go into effect If the box is not checked the remaining settings are persisted but are not in effect Caution Selection of numerous harmonics and interharmonics can exceed the total number of journal parameters typically 200 that can be trended Voltage and current harmonics for each phase and neutral channel can be trended under HARMONICS TO TREND Similarly voltage and current interharmonics for each Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide sample interharmonic values to trend phase and neutral channel can also be trended under INTERHARMONICS TO TREND The value fields are left blank to allow the users to choose the numbers or the range of harmonic frequencies to trend Numbers can be entered individually with commas separating the numbers or a range of harmonics can be specified using a dash between lower and upper values Also the suffix o or e can be used to specify only the odd or even harmonics respectively in a given range Selecting numerous harmonics indiscriminately can take up all of the allowable trending parameters Users are advised to select harmonics to trend prudently Resulting individual harmonic sampling and graphs can be seen in the Smart Trends folder under the Views tab 8 21 5530 5520 DataNode Setup 8 22 14 Transducers tab Properties aes Phase rotation Nor
300. varh 0 00000000 Partia peak energy consumption kvarh 0 00000000 Off peak energy consumption kvarh 0 00000000 Tax Rate 0 06000000 al Peak time ia 3 anf of Setup screen for Energy Usage Rate Structures Enable Rate Structure For the rate structure to be available in the energy expense reports it must be enabled Check the box to activate or clear the box to deactivate Rate Structure Name The name used to describe the rate structure This name will be displayed in the list for selecting a rate structure On peak energy consumption KWHr The cost of energy consumption measured in kWHr during the peak time Off peak energy consumption kWHr The cost of energy consumption measured in kWHr during the off peak time On peak power consumption kW The penalty charged for the maximum demand kW that occurred during peak time over the billing period Off peak power consumption kW The penalty charged for the maximum demand kW that occurred during off peak time over the billing period On peak energy consumption kvarHr The cost of energy consumption measured in kvarHr during the peak time Off peak energy consumption kvarHr The cost of energy consumption measured in kvarHr during the off peak time Tax Rate The tax applied on billings Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 23 7 24 Setup Page 5 kvar Change Observer The kvar Change Observer Answer Modu
301. ver reset Reset Peak Current Demand B Never reset Reset Peak Current Demand C Never reset eset Peak Current Demand N Never reset eset Average Peak Current Demand Never reset D 0 0 BIB 0 0O o o Reset All Values m D Q lt gt o e 3 Reset Phase Energy Never reset eset Total Energy Never reset eset Integrated Reactive Power Never reset eset Total integrated Reactive Power Never reset JJ eset Forward tot fund freq WHrs Never reset eset Reverse tot fund freq WHrs Never reset Reset Forward fund freq VarHrs Never reset Reset Reverse fund freq VarHrs Never reset eset Forward tot fund freq VarHrs Never reset eset Reverse tot fund freq VarHrs Never reset Reset Fundamental freq V A Hours Never reset aola feas o D n o D c 22 lt 2 a 2 o a eer Cc Hc cy rz oo gt o o A TIT SS oo Eden zz 22 6 cu ES e E d 3 n o o ER D D Reset Total Fund freq VA Hours Never reset In connection with electric utility billing practices the InfoNode and DataNode system has an interface to reset demand and energy accumulation readings The Accumulator Resets tab allows one to reset the parameters to defined values but not to change or config ure new values The notation Never reset appears to mean that the parameter values register original readings and have never been reset at any time The moment the reset p
302. verage DPF Arithmetic average of each phase displacement power factor Current The flow of electricity in a circuit as expressed in amperes Current refers to the quantity or intensity of electrical flow See voltage Deadband or Sensitivity A value programmed as an incremental decremental threshold from the last deadband value that would be recorded as an event making it the new value to be com pared with Delta A type of connection in a three phase circuit often the primary side of a transformer A delta connection may or may not have a neutral conductor Demand Interval Time interval used for the power demand values to be calculated The values are updated every sub interval Demand Sub interval An interval less than the demand interval equal to the demand interval divided by an integer value Demand calculations are made every sub interval on the values that occured during the most recent Demand Interval Values become valid after the first Demand Interval has expired Displacement PF Cosine of angle between fundamental frequency voltage and current on a per phase basis Distortion An abnormal waveshape Distribution Outside the building distribution refers to the process of routing power from the power plant to the users Inside the building distribution is the process of using feeders and circuits to provide power to devices Fixed Base A fixed nominal value that is used with the limits in per cent
303. vice QOS Compliance Summary Table 11 10 2002 17 15 00 to Edison SE 5560 I s BMI Compliance Summary Report 11 11 2002 09 59 59 admin Table of Contents See page 10 13 10 14 1 Compliance Summary 10 15 2 Compliance Graph 3 Event Statistics 10 16 4 Harmonics Graph 10 16 5 Interharmonics Graph B Power Frequency Graph 10 17 7 Min Max Tables 10 18 TOC TOC 12345678 gt gt Next gt gt QOS Compliance Table of Contents Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 5560 QOS QOS Compliance Reports The compliance reports listed under the Table of Contents are for a single 5560 DataNode and appear as hyperlinks Click on the hyperlink to view the report in detail Each compliance report graph and statistical data is described below Note that these reports are identical to data that are accessible from the Views tab except that Reports does not produce data in hyperlinks e g user will not be able to click on a bar as if it is a link 1 Compliance Summary The QOS Status Summary table lists the evaluation periods that fall within the selected date range of a single DataNode For completed periods weeks Compliance status may either be PASS or FAIL For incomplete periods less than a week Compliance status is Undetermined Unlike the QOS Status Summary see page 10 5 accessible from Views Compliance information accessed from Reports 1 e
304. ween the two curves will not usually cause equipment to malfunction equipment with a similar set of susceptibles to those used to develop the curve whereas those outside the limits are likely to cause problems Rr Signature System InfoNode Home f Views Reports Real time Setup RMS Magnitude Duration View All time 5540 Edison Incoming 5571 Edison Incoming Es he 150 Event Summary CBEMA RMS Variations Transients Snapshots Help B Views Topics E Index 2 1005 T 5 5 g ri S gt o e 50 0 horny ERELTI REELI 0 0 0 01 0 1 1 10 100 1000 10000 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 4 7 4 8 Views Page 3 Smart Trend Smart Trend will display a timeline type graph for a large range of parameters based on the type of DataNode and which parameters were saved for trending After using the standard query to select the DataNodes and time date range a dis play of all possible parameters that can be trended is shown Clicking on a green check mark onscreen will trend that parameter for the selected phase and will also show a histogram of the different values with a cumulative probability line Red X marks onscreen indicate that the particular parameter is not available for trending See sample display screens below Transformer K Factor VA Angle Harmonic Power Unsigned Harmonic Power Voltage TID Voltage THD Rms IEEE 519 Current TDD Voltage TID
305. wer Threshold Trigger Rms Voltage Maximum A mmu ims Voltage Average A 12 02 2001 18 28 14 148 Instantaneous Sag Dranetz 3MI Electrotek Concepts 3 seconds 3 sec 1 min gt 1 minute Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Appendix Summary of Power Quality Variations Waveform Distortion A E ug Continuous distortion A a L Harmonic Distortion ll A Ha 2nd 49nd harmonic f ME NJ f j en components o NN LE Z um E A Eales vie V L VU UM asan i i i i i V i r 40 18 0 055 0 06 0 065 0 07 Time see 0 076 0 08 0 085 0 09 Nu Y Mi Noise Af N High frequency distortion jl MJ Jk hy Broadband spectral p components 200 kHz K Nu NL pa Padra Voltage Fluctuations A A Intermittent magnitude variations Flicker j Lo n Frequency components 25 Hz i j4 34 V WM V WV vi ul v d V Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide A 3 C Appendix System Parameters Affecting Power Quality and Diagnostic Evaluations C auses in pacts e Lightning e Transformer failures e Arrester failures e Customer equipment damage due to low side surges Low frequency e Capacitor switching e Tripping of ASDs and other transients sensitive equipment e Voltage magnific ation at customer capacitors Medium frequency e Traveling waves from e Failure of customer equipment transients lightning impulses transient
306. y Data Time ins Voltage Minimum A BEER Maximum AB ms Voltage Minimum b Maximum Full Scale Zoom Out 1 4 00 vertical scroll bar Base 207 8 Vrms right click on the graph to set user preference properties see page 4 3 1 11 01 2001 12 00 00 00 Rims Voltage Average AB Dranetz BMIGVBectrotek Concepts Event List di pr arrow keys field descriptors i horizontal Start Time Event Type Channel Charat All time Base 207 8 Vims scroll bar Timeline Graph and Event List display Rms Voltage Minimum AB ei 10 31 2001 12 00 00 00 0 00 1 11 01 2001 12 00 00 00 1 15 00 Rms Voltage Maximum AB game Rms Voltage Average AB Dranetz BMI amp VBectrotek Concepts 4 j V Percent Anstantaneous Voltage A Base 169 7 Vpk D 0 1 Time sec Trigger 10 31 2001 14 27 54 16 RMS Variation Oranete BMIG Bectrotek Concepts Timeline View with Event Detail Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 4 5 4 6 Views Page Z Smart Views There are a number of different views of the data that have been specified by type These include magnitude versus duration graphs lists of all of the events or lists of events that are classified by IEEE 1159 as RMS variations or tran sients The same Query Section in the Timeline appears to allow you to select what date time
307. y consumption The user may specify the square footage that each DataNode is monitoring This will allow the user to view energy expense on per square foot basis The setup required for the DataNodes can be seen below Properties Values DataNodes Edison 5540 Edison 5571 Edison SE 5530 Edison SE 5560 Square Footage i P y Peak Time Aiai iARate Structures ci Setup screen for Energy Usage DataNodes Square Footage Select the desired DataNode and enter the square footage that the DataNode is monitoring 7 22 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Setup Page Rate Structures The user may define up to twenty different rate structures The user defined rate structures allow users to produce energy expense reports that accurately reflect the charges being applied by a respective energy provider The setups required are discussed below Properties Values Rate Structure Rate Structure 1 Rate Structure 2 Rate Structure 3 Rate Structure 4 Rate Structure 5 Rate Structure 6 Rate Structure 7 Enable Rate Structure v Rate Structure Name PSEG On peak energy consumption kwHr 0 08234700 Partia peak energy consumption kWHr 0 00000000 Off peak energy consumption kwHr 0 05575200 On peak power consumption kWw 7 61000000 Partia peak power consumption kW 0 00000000 Off peak power consumption kW 1 17000000 On peak energy consumption k
308. y feeder imaginary The imaginary part of the complex number zero sequence impedance 5 Ss Pe Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide 7 26 Setup Page 73 RBM Reliability Benchmarking Methodology s Aggregation Parameters The RBM Answer Module is an RMS Variation Index The setup for this Answer Module consists of setting up aggregation parameters At different times it may be necessary to either break apart measurements into measurement components or combine them through aggregation The setup required for aggregation can be seen below Properties Characterization Level Temporal Aggregation Agaregation Time 1 Minute Fixed Aggregation Window Type Worst Case Method Setup screen for RBM Aggregation Parameters Characterization Level Phase Aggregation The most basic of the three aggregation levels is phase aggregation This characterizes the data in such a way that all of the phases are analyzed Measurement components are the constituent recordings of a three phase measurement By definition measurement components are single phase The process of phase aggregation entails finding the worst case of a series of measurement components associated with a single phase or channel Measurement Aggregation Measurement aggregation represents all of the data from all phases of a measurement by the characteristics of the worst case phase An event determined by measurement aggrega
309. y through the linked pages 3 Index The Index page operates exactly like the Index portion of a book Information is listed and categorized in alphabetical order Click any button from A to Z to show various related topics under each letter The topics are featured as hyperlinks The Contents button operates exactly like the Table of Contents in books Information is listed and organized under different headings The headings normally used here are the menu tab names Sub topics per heading appear as hyperlinks 3 3 3 Home Page This page intentionally left blank 3 4 Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide This chapter describes the various interactive graphical display screens formatted primarily for viewing data through the browser as opposed to printing out If you want to generate reports in print format please select the Reports tab and turn to Chapter 5 Reports Page General Procedures In Making Queries The Views and Reports tabs both use a common Query section where you select whether to display graphs or reports in a new window or an existing window select which DataNodes are to be included in the presentation and over what time period to select the data from To arrive at your desired information follow the designated procedures below To Select Multiple DataNodes keep the Control key depressed while using the mouse and its left button to select the DataNodes of choice NOTE This option functions
310. ys gt Setup Screen for RMS Variation Indices Report Monitoring Days Method Many of the EPRI RBM RMS variation indices provide frequency of occurrence information or rates of occurrence The EPRI RBM technical report TR 107938 discusses in detail the necessity of normalizing these rates based on the data upon which the indices are calculated There are two normalization methods Estimated and None No Normalization Estimated The Estimated normalization method algorithm estimates the number of days a monitor is considered on line by calcu lating the number of days between the From and To dates specified on the Date and Time Selection of the report setup None No Normalization The No Normalization method results in a count rather than a rate Thus all frequency of occurrence indices calculated using this normalization method are counts of all aggregate measurements occurring during the specified time period Index Normalization Setup The Normalization Rate control designates the time period number of day s data to which the rate indices are normalized If the Normalization Method control is set to None there is no rate used so the Rate control is disabled Signature System InfoNode on PC User s Guide Reports Page gt moe ORANETZ Index 90 80 70 50 10 SARFI 18 000 6 000 6 000 0 000 0 000 SIARFI 13 000 6 000 6 000 0 000 0 000 see note below SMARFI 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000 0 000
311. ystem Right click on the ADAM Module folder and click on Add DataNode to add your particular ADAM module Select the ADAM DataNode site name type and your work space area will be dis played on the right frame Polling rate for ADAM modules typically last from 2 to 5 seconds not a guaranteed rate Use the tabs across the bottom of the page to select the appropriate group of programmable features The parameters avail able in each tab are discussed in detail in the next section 1 General tab Ww Signature System InfoNode Reports Real Setup z Setup Properties Values E InfoNode Identification Information m Users Name Service_Entrance_From_KYZ_Pulse Description torage Log a Notifications s Communications Version 4080 01D1 0 Serial Number NONE Status Information Active v Get settings from DataNode on activation Last contact at 1 04 2002 14 44 25 Health Normal s RBM Verification 3 520 DataNode zm 5540 DataNode e 5560 DataNode TA DataNode i 4 gt I gt General Basic Channel Advanced Save Setup Copyright 1999 2002 Dranetz B il and Bectrotek Concepts Inc All rights reserved User Agreement The General tab is common with all other Instrument Handler Setup tabs It contains ADAM DataNode specific status information IDENTIFICATION INFORMATION includes the name and description that users can assign to the ADAM DataNode Simply click on t

PC-InfoNode User`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents